Panasonic All in One Printer KX MB2060 User Manual
Operating Instructions  
Multi-Function Printer  
Model No.  
KX-MB2060  
KX-MB2061  
The pictured model is KX-MB2061.  
Do NOT connect the unit to a computer with the USB cable until prompted to do so during the setup  
of Multi-Function Station (CD-ROM).  
1
2
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY: 1-877-833-8855  
Important:  
L To use cordless handset features with KX-MB2060, please purchase an additional digital cordless  
handset (page 8).  
R This unit is compatible with Caller ID. Subscription to the appropriate service through your service  
provider/telephone company is required.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important Information  
drum cartridge contains a photosensitive drum.  
Exposing it to light may damage the drum. Once you  
have opened the protective bag:  
For your safety  
Laser radiation  
–
Do not expose the drum cartridge to light for more  
than 5 minutes.  
R The printer of this unit utilizes a laser. Use of controls  
or adjustments or performance of procedures other  
than those specified herein may result in hazardous  
radiation exposure.  
–
–
Do not touch or scratch the black drum surface.  
Do not place the drum cartridge near dust or dirt,  
or in a high humidity area.  
Fuser unit  
–
Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct  
sunlight.  
R During or immediately after printing, the fuser unit  
(A) gets hot. This is normal. Do not touch the fuser  
unit.  
R To extend the life of the drum cartridge, the power  
switch should never be turned OFF immediately after  
printing. Leave the power turned ON for a minimum  
of 30 minutes after printing.  
Note:  
R The area near the output tray (B) may also get warm.  
Location  
This is normal.  
R To avoid malfunction, do not position the unit near  
appliances such as TVs or speakers which generate  
an intense magnetic field.  
Static electricity  
R To prevent static electricity damage to the interface  
connectors or other electrical components inside the  
unit, touch a grounded metal surface before touching  
the components.  
A
Environment  
R Keep the unit away from electrical noise generating  
devices, such as fluorescent lamps and motors.  
R The unit should be kept free from dust, high  
temperature and vibration.  
R The unit should not be exposed to direct sunlight.  
R Do not place heavy objects on top of the unit. When  
you leave the unit unused for a long period of time,  
unplug this unit from the power outlet.  
B
R The unit should be kept away from heat sources such  
as heaters, kitchen stoves, etc. Damp basements  
should also be avoided.  
For best performance  
Toner cartridge and drum cartridge  
R Do not cover slots or openings on the base unit.  
Inspect the air circulation vents regularly and remove  
any dust build-up with a vacuum cleaner (A).  
R When replacing the toner cartridge or drum cartridge,  
do not allow dust, water, or liquids to come in contact  
with the drum. This may affect print quality.  
R For optimal performance, genuine Panasonic toner  
cartridges and drum cartridges are recommended.  
We cannot be responsible for problems that may be  
caused by a non-Panasonic toner cartridge or drum  
cartridge:  
A
–
–
–
Damage to the unit  
Poor print quality  
Improper operation  
Toner cartridge  
A
R Do not leave the toner cartridge out of the protective  
bag for a long time. It will decrease the toner life.  
Drum cartridge  
Routine care  
R Read the instructions on page 12 before you begin  
installation of the drum cartridge. After you have read  
them, open the drum cartridge protective bag. The  
R Wipe the outer surface of the unit with a soft cloth. Do  
not use benzine, thinner, or any abrasive powder.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
 
Important Information  
Cordless handset communication (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
Illegal copies  
R It is unlawful to make copies of certain  
R The base unit and other compatible Panasonic units  
use radio waves to communicate with each other.  
For maximum coverage and noise-free  
documents.  
Copying certain documents may be illegal in your  
country. Penalties of fines and/or imprisonment may  
be imposed on those found guilty. The following are  
examples of items that may be illegal to copy in your  
country.  
communications, place your base unit:  
–
–
–
at a convenient, high, and central location with no  
obstructions between the cordless handset and  
base unit in an indoor environment.  
away from electronic appliances such as TVs,  
radios, personal computers, wireless devices, or  
other phones.  
facing away from radio frequency transmitters,  
such as external antennas of mobile phone cell  
stations. (Avoid putting the base unit on a bay  
window or near a window.)  
–
–
–
–
–
Currency  
Bank notes and checks  
Bank and government bonds and securities  
Passports and identification cards  
Copyright material or trademarks without the  
consent of the owner  
–
Postage stamps and other negotiable  
instruments  
R Coverage and voice quality depends on the local  
environmental conditions.  
This list is not inclusive and no liability is  
assumed for either its completeness or accuracy.  
In case of doubt, contact your legal counsel.  
R If the reception for a base unit location is not  
satisfactory, move the base unit to another location  
for better reception.  
Notice:  
R The maximum calling distance may be shortened  
when the unit is used in the following places: Near  
obstacles such as hills, tunnels, underground, near  
metal objects such as wire fences, etc.  
R Install your machine near a supervised area to  
prevent illegal copies from being made.  
R Operating the product near electrical appliances may  
cause interference. Move away from the electrical  
appliances.  
Moving the base unit  
When moving the base unit, hold by the grips (A) on both  
sides.  
A
A
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Table of Contents  
4.2 Scanning from a computer (Pull  
Scan) ...........................................................40  
1. Introduction and Installation  
Accessories  
1.1 Supplied accessories ....................................7  
1.2 Accessory information ...................................7  
Finding the Controls  
1.3 Button descriptions of the base unit ..............8  
1.4 Button descriptions of the cordless handset  
(KX-MB2060 optional) ...................................9  
1.5 Display descriptions of the cordless handset  
(KX-MB2060 optional) .................................10  
1.6 Overview .....................................................10  
Installation  
1.7 Toner cartridge and drum cartridge .............12  
1.8 Output tray ..................................................15  
1.9 Recording paper ..........................................16  
Telephone  
1.10 Handset unit ................................................18  
1.11 Battery installation / replacement (KX-MB2060  
optional) ......................................................19  
1.12 Belt clip (KX-MB2060 optional) ...................20  
5. Copier  
Copy  
5.1 Making a copy .............................................42  
5.2 More copying features .................................43  
6. Telephone  
Making and Answering Calls  
6.1 Making phone calls .....................................49  
6.2 Answering phone calls ................................50  
6.3 Silent mode .................................................50  
Automatic Dialing  
6.4 One-touch dial feature and shared  
phonebook ..................................................51  
6.5 Chain dial (Cordless handset only, KX-MB2060  
optional) ......................................................53  
7. Caller ID  
Caller ID  
2. Preparation  
Connections and Setup  
7.1 Caller ID ......................................................54  
7.2 Viewing and calling back using caller  
information ..................................................55  
7.3 Erasing caller information ............................55  
7.4 Storing caller information ............................56  
2.1 Connections ................................................21  
2.2 Battery charge (KX-MB2060  
optional) ......................................................22  
2.3 Intelligent eco mode (KX-MB2060  
optional) ......................................................23  
2.4 Turning the power ON .................................23  
2.5 Dialing mode for the base unit, and cordless  
handset (KX-MB2060 optional) ...................24  
2.6 Selecting the operation mode (Scan/Copy/  
Fax) .............................................................24  
Document Requirements  
2.7 Setting the original ......................................25  
Help  
2.8 Help function ...............................................26  
Volume  
8. Fax  
Sending Faxes  
8.1 Sending a fax manually ...............................57  
8.2 Sending a fax using one-touch dial feature and  
phonebook ..................................................58  
8.3 Broadcast transmission ...............................59  
8.4 Sending an electronic document as a fax  
message from your computer .....................61  
Receiving Faxes  
8.5 Selecting the way to use your unit ..............61  
8.6 Receiving a fax automatically: Auto answer  
ON ...............................................................62  
8.7 Receiving a fax manually: Auto answer  
OFF .............................................................64  
8.8 Junk fax prohibitor (preventing fax reception  
from undesired callers) ................................65  
8.9 Receiving a fax on your computer ...............65  
8.10 Web fax preview (LAN connection  
only) ............................................................66  
2.9 Adjusting the volume ...................................27  
Initial Programming  
2.10 Date and time ..............................................28  
2.11 Your logo .....................................................29  
2.12 Your fax number ..........................................29  
2.13 Configuring the unit to access the  
LAN .............................................................30  
2.14 Installing Multi-Function Station ..................31  
2.15 Starting Multi-Function Station ....................33  
9. Distinctive Ring  
3. Printer  
Distinctive Ring  
Printer  
9.1 Distinctive Ring service ...............................68  
9.2 Using two or more phone numbers on a single  
telephone line ..............................................68  
9.3 Using three or more phone numbers on a single  
telephone line ..............................................68  
9.4 Programming the ring pattern assigned for  
fax ...............................................................68  
3.1 Printing from Windows applications ............35  
3.2 Easy Print Utility ..........................................36  
4. Scanner  
Scanner  
4.1 Scanning from the base unit (Push  
Scan) ...........................................................37  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
15.2 Document jams (Automatic document  
10.Answering Machine  
Recording  
feeder) .......................................................131  
10.1 Recording your greeting message ..............69  
10.2 Leaving a voice message for others or yourself  
(Memo recording) ........................................69  
10.3 Recording a telephone conversation ...........69  
Listening  
16.Cleaning  
Cleaning  
16.1 Cleaning the white plates and glass ..........133  
16.2 Cleaning the document feeder  
rollers ........................................................136  
10.4 Listening to voice messages .......................70  
Voice Transfer  
17.General Information  
Printed Reports  
17.1 Reference lists and reports (Base unit  
only) ..........................................................137  
Specifications  
17.2 Specifications ............................................137  
Copyrights  
17.3 Information of copyrights and  
licenses .....................................................141  
10.5 Transferring a specific voice message to email  
address (voice to email address) (LAN  
connection only) ..........................................71  
10.6 Transferring a specific voice message to a  
computer (voice to PC) ...............................71  
Remote Operation  
10.7 Receiving all incoming voice messages on your  
computer .....................................................72  
10.8 Listening to voice messages via a web browser  
(web voice playback) (LAN connection  
only) ............................................................73  
10.9 Operating from a remote location ................73  
10.10 Using the answering machine with the cordless  
handset (KX-MB2060 optional) ...................74  
18.Index  
18.1 Index..........................................................153  
11.Programmable Features  
Features Summary  
11.1 Base unit programming ...............................77  
11.2 Cordless handset programming (KX-MB2060  
optional) ......................................................99  
12.Multi-unit Operation (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
Additional Units  
12.1 Operating additional units .........................104  
12.2 Registering a cordless handset to a base  
unit ............................................................104  
Other Features  
12.3 Intercom ....................................................104  
12.4 Transferring a call/conference ...................105  
13.Useful Information  
Useful Information  
13.1 Character entry .........................................106  
13.2 Status of the base unit ..............................107  
13.3 Canceling the operations ..........................108  
14.Help  
Reports and Displays  
14.1 Report messages ......................................109  
14.2 Display messages .....................................110  
Troubleshooting  
14.3 When a function does not work .................114  
15.Paper Jams  
Jams  
15.1 Recording paper jam .................................126  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Introduction and Installation  
*3  
K Handset cradle  
L
Cordless handset  
*2  
1.1 Supplied accessories  
(PNYE1018Z)  
1. . Introduction and Installation  
A Toner cartridge  
B Drum cartridge  
*1  
*2  
(starter)  
(KX-FAD462)  
M Rechargeable  
batteries  
N AC adaptor  
*2*3  
(PQLV219Y)  
(HHR-4DPA  
(HHR-55AAABU or  
N4DHYYY00004))  
*3  
C CD-ROM  
D Important  
*2  
*2  
information guide  
(English–  
PNQW2407Z)  
(PNJKMB2060Z)  
*2  
(Spanish–  
PNQW2408Z)  
*2  
O Charger  
(PNLC1010ZB)  
P Belt clip  
*2*3  
*2*3  
(PNKE1054Z1)  
E Quick installation  
F Output tray  
(PNZEMB2030EB)  
*1 Prints about 500 pages at ISO/IEC 19752 standard  
page.  
*2 Part numbers are subject to change without notice.  
*3 KX-MB2061 only  
*2  
guide  
*2  
(PNQW2309Z)  
Important:  
R To use cordless handset features with  
KX-MB2060, please purchase an additional  
digital cordless handset.  
Note:  
G Power cord  
H Telephone line cord  
R Save the original carton and packing materials for  
*2  
*2  
(PNJA1022Z)  
(PFJA02B002Y)  
future shipping and transportation of the unit.  
R After unpacking the product, take care of the packing  
materials and/or power plug cap appropriately.  
1.2 Accessory information  
Accessories for this unit can be ordered online, by fax,  
or by telephone.  
Please note that headset orders can be accepted via the  
internet.  
I Handset  
J Handset cord  
*2  
*2  
(PNLXE1011Z)  
(PQJA212V)  
To ensure that the unit operates properly, we  
recommend the use of Panasonic toner and drum  
cartridges.  
n Replacement accessory  
–
Toner cartridge  
R Model No. (Part No.): KX-FAT461  
R Prints about 2,000 pages at ISO/IEC 19752  
standard page.  
–
–
Drum cartridge  
R Model No. (Part No.): KX-FAD462  
Rechargeable batteries  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
         
1. Introduction and Installation  
R Model No. (Part No.): HHR-4DPA  
1.3 Button descriptions of the  
base unit  
R 2 rechargeable nickel metal hydride (Ni-MH)  
batteries, AAA (R03) size  
R Replacement batteries may have a different  
capacity from that of the supplied batteries.  
n Optional accessory  
ABCDEFGHIJK L  
M
–
Additional digital cordless handset  
R Model No. (Part No.): KX-TGA651  
–
Headset  
R Model No. (Part No.): KX-TCA60, KX-TCA93,  
KX-TCA94, KX-TCA400, KX-TCA430  
Note:  
R ISO/IEC 19752 standard is as follows:  
N O P Q RS T U VWXY  
Z
–
–
Environment: 23 ± 2 °C (73 ± 3 °F) / 50 ± 10% RH  
Print mode: Continuous printing  
Station keys  
R To use the one-touch dial feature (page 51,  
To place an order online (for customers in the  
U.S.A. or Puerto Rico)  
58).  
MManual BroadN  
Visit our web site:  
R To send a document to multiple parties by using  
http://www.panasonic.com/mfpsupplies  
R For questions regarding online orders:  
Email:  
the dial keypad (page 59).  
MBroadcastN  
R To send a document to multiple parties  
[email protected]  
Telephone: (800) 405-0652  
(page 59).  
MScanN  
To place an order by fax*1  
Fax: (800) 237-9080  
R To switch to the scan mode (page 24, 37).  
MCopy SizeN  
Include:  
R To select the copy size (page 42).  
MPhonebookN  
R To initiate the phonebook (page 52, 60).  
– your name, shipping address and telephone  
number  
– credit card type, number, expiration date and your  
signature  
MPlaybackN  
R To play messages (page 70).  
– part number and quantity  
MVoice to PCN  
R To transfer a voice message to an email address  
(page 71), or a computer (page 71).  
To place an order by telephone*1  
Telephone: (800) 332-5368  
MContrastN  
(Monday - Friday 9 am to 9 pm, EST.)  
R To select the contrast when copying (page 42).  
*1 Except for cordless handset.  
R To select the contrast when sending a fax  
(page 57).  
MResolutionN  
R To select the resolution when copying  
(page 42).  
R To select the resolution when sending a fax  
(page 57).  
MZoomN  
R To enlarge or reduce a document when copying  
(page 43).  
MQuick ScanN  
R To store a scanned document into memory, and  
then send it (page 58).  
MPage LayoutN  
R To make copies using various page layouts  
(page 44).  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
   
1. Introduction and Installation  
MCaller IDN  
R To use Caller ID features (page 54).  
MStartN  
R To copy a document (page 42).  
R To scan a document (push scan) (page 37).  
R To send a fax (page 57).  
MEraseN  
R To erase messages (page 69, 70).  
MRecordN  
R To record a greeting message, conversation or  
1.4 Button descriptions of the  
cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
memo message (page 69).  
MStopN  
R To stop an operation or programming session.  
R To erase a character/number.  
MAuto AnswerN  
A
B
E
R To turn the auto answer setting ON/OFF  
(page 62).  
F
G
C
MLowerN  
R To select station 4-6 for the one-touch dial feature  
(page 51, 58).  
MLocatorN/MIntercomN  
D
R To put a call on hold (page 49).  
R To make/answer intercom calls (page 104).  
R To page or locate a cordless handset  
(KX-MB2060 optional) (page 104).  
Soft keys  
R To select the features or operations displayed  
MFaxN  
directly above each key (page 10).  
R To switch to the fax mode (page 24, 57).  
MCopyN  
M
N (Talk)  
R To make/answer calls (page 49, 50).  
N (Speakerphone)  
R To switch to the copy mode (page 24, 42).  
MRedialNMPauseN  
M
R For speakerphone operation.  
R To redial the last number dialed. If the line is busy  
when you send a fax, the unit will automatically  
redial the number 1 time.  
MGN (Tone)  
R To change from pulse to tone temporarily during  
R To insert a pause during dialing.  
dialing when your line has rotary pulse service.  
MFlashN  
MOFFN  
R To access special telephone services such as call  
waiting (page 54) or for transferring extension  
calls.  
R To hang up (page 49, 50).  
R To stop an operation or programming.  
Navigator  
MMonitorN  
R To adjust the receiver or speaker volume (up or  
down) while talking (page 27).  
R To scroll through various lists or items  
R To initiate dialing.  
When you press MMonitorN while receiving a call,  
you will be able to hear the other party, but the  
other party will not be able to hear you.  
(page 53).  
R
R
MCIDFN (Caller ID): To move the cursor (left) to  
view the caller list.  
MEREDIALN: To move the cursor (right) to view  
MMenuN  
R To start or exit programming.  
Navigator key  
the redial list.  
MFLASHNMCALL WAITN  
R To select desired settings.  
R To access special telephone services or for  
transferring extension calls.  
R The flash time can be changed (feature #121 on  
R To adjust the volume (page 27).  
R To search for a stored item (page 58).  
MSetN  
page 78).  
R To store a setting during programming.  
R To access special telephone services such as call  
waiting (page 54) or for transferring extension  
calls.  
MToneN  
R To change from pulse to tone temporarily during  
dialing when your line has rotary/pulse service.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9
     
1. Introduction and Installation  
1.5 Display descriptions of the  
cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
1.6 Overview  
1.6.1 Base unit front view  
Display items  
A
B C  
D E  
Display  
Meaning  
item  
Within base unit range  
Out of base unit range  
The line is in use.  
R When flashing:  
The call is put on hold.  
R When flashing rapidly:  
An incoming call is now being  
received.  
Eco mode is ON. (page 23)  
Speakerphone is ON. (page 49)  
Ringer volume is OFF. (page 27)  
Silent mode is ON. (page 51)  
Alarm is ON. (page 103)  
Cordless handset number  
Battery level  
F
G H  
I
J
K
“In use”  
Answering machine is being used by  
another cordless handset or the base  
unit.  
L
“Line in  
Someone is using the line.  
use”  
Top cover  
Soft keys  
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) cover  
Document guides  
Document cover  
The cordless handset features 3 soft keys. By pressing  
a soft key, you can select the feature shown directly  
above it on the display.  
Power switch  
Output tray  
Document entrance  
Paper input tray  
Recording paper exit  
Document exit  
Symbols used in these operating instructions  
Symbol  
Meaning  
Speaker  
“ ”  
Select the words in quotations shown  
on the display (e.g., “Date and  
time”) by pressing MCN or MDN.  
Handset unit connection jack  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
       
1. Introduction and Installation  
1.6.2 Base unit rear view  
1.6.3 Cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
A
B
C
A
E
B C  
D
D
E
F G  
Recording paper guides  
LED  
F
G
LAN interface connector  
R 10Base-T/100Base-TX  
Power inlet  
Charge indicator  
Ringer indicator  
Message indicator  
Nonslip pad  
Manual input tray (Rear cover)  
Telephone line jack  
Speaker  
USB interface connector  
Headset jack  
Receiver  
Microphone  
Charge contacts  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
1. Introduction and Installation  
3 Place the toner cartridge (C) into the drum cartridge  
1.7 Toner cartridge and drum  
cartridge  
(D) vertically.  
C
The supplied toner cartridge is a starter toner cartridge.  
Caution:  
R Read the following instructions before you begin  
installation. After you have read them, open the  
drum cartridge protective bag. The drum  
cartridge contains a photosensitive drum.  
Exposing it to light may damage the drum. Once  
you have opened the protective bag:  
–
–
–
–
Do not expose the drum cartridge to light for  
more than 5 minutes.  
Do not touch or scratch the black drum  
surface inside of the drum cartridge.  
Do not place the drum cartridge near dust or  
dirt, or in a high humidity area.  
Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct  
sunlight.  
D
4 Press down the toner cartridge firmly (E). Keep  
pressing while turning the green lever on each side  
of the toner cartridge towards you (F).  
R Do not leave the toner cartridge out of the  
protective bag for a long time. It will decrease the  
toner life.  
E
E
R We cannot be responsible for any damage to the  
unit or degradation of print quality which may  
occur from the use of a non-Panasonic toner and  
drum cartridges.  
F
F
R Do not add toner to the toner cartridge.  
1 Before opening the protective bag of the new toner  
cartridge, shake it vertically more than 5 times.  
5 Make sure that the arrows (G) match, to install the  
toner cartridge correctly.  
G
2 Remove the toner cartridge and drum cartridge from  
the protection bags. Peel off the seal (A) from the  
toner cartridge.  
R Do not touch or scratch the black drum surface  
(B).  
A
B
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
   
1. Introduction and Installation  
6 Open the top cover (H) by holding the indentations  
7 Install the drum and toner cartridge (L) by holding  
(I) on both sides of the base unit.  
the tabs.  
J
H
I
L
I
Note:  
R Make sure that the arrows (M) match, to install  
the drum and toner cartridge correctly.  
R Do not touch the transfer roller (J).  
R If the lower glass (K) is dirty, clean it with a soft  
and dry cloth.  
K
M
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
1. Introduction and Installation  
poor or “REPLACE DRUM” appears on the display,  
replace the toner cartridge and drum cartridge.  
8 Close the top cover by holding the indentations on  
both sides of the base unit, until locked.  
R To ensure that the unit operates properly, we  
recommend the use of Panasonic toner and drum  
cartridges. See page 7 for accessory information.  
R To maintain print quality and machine life, we  
recommend you to clean slots and openings  
(page 3) and the inside of the base unit (page 133,  
136) when replacing the toner cartridge and/or drum  
cartridge.  
R See page 139 for information on toner life and drum  
life.  
Waste disposal method  
Waste material should be disposed of under conditions  
which meet all national and local environmental  
regulations.  
Toner save feature  
If you want to reduce toner consumption, set the toner  
save setting to ON (feature #482 on page 82). The  
toner cartridge will last approximately 20 % longer. This  
feature may lower the print quality.  
Caution:  
R To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your  
hands under the top cover.  
When to replace the toner and drum cartridges  
When the display shows the following, replace the toner  
cartridge.  
–
“TONER LOW”  
–
“TONER EMPTY”  
Note:  
R To check the drum life and quality, please print the  
printer test list (page 137) and refer to page 140 for  
information on the drum life. If printing quality is still  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
 
1. Introduction and Installation  
If the top part of the extender is detached  
1.8 Output tray  
Insert the output tray (A) until it clicks into place, and  
1. With the top part of the extender in the open position,  
insert the tab (A) into the left hole (B) of the  
extender.  
then press the center part (B) of the extender to open it.  
A
B
A
2. Slide the other tab (C) into the right hole (D) of the  
extender from below until it clicks into place.  
B
D
C
Note:  
R Do not place the base unit in an area where the output  
tray may be easily bumped into.  
R The output tray can hold up to approximately 100  
sheets of printed paper (the number of sheets may  
vary depending on the usage environment). Remove  
the printed paper before the output tray becomes full.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
 
1. Introduction and Installation  
room at all times. If you print using moist paper, it may  
cause paper jam.  
1.9 Recording paper  
The paper input tray unit can hold:  
1 Pull the paper input tray (A) until it clicks into place,  
then pull it completely out, lifting the front part of the  
tray.  
2
2
–
Up to 250 sheets of 64 g/m to 75 g/m (17 lb to  
20 lb) paper.  
2
–
–
Up to 230 sheets of 80 g/m (21 lb) paper.  
2
Up to 200 sheets of 90 g/m (24 lb) paper.  
R A4, letter, B5 and 16K-size paper can be used. B5  
and 16K-size paper can only be used when using the  
unit for printing or copying.  
R Please refer to page 138 for information on recording  
paper.  
R The unit is set for printing letter-size plain paper  
by default.  
–
To use other paper sizes, change the  
recording paper size setting (feature #380 on  
page 80).  
–
To use thin paper, change the recording paper  
type setting (feature #383 on page 81).  
A
Note for recording paper:  
R We recommend that you test paper (especially  
special sizes and types of paper) on the unit before  
purchasing large quantities.  
2 Before loading a stack of paper, fan the paper to  
prevent paper jams.  
R Do not use the following types of paper:  
–
Paper with cotton and/or fiber content that is over  
20 %, such as letterhead paper or paper used for  
resumes  
–
Extremely smooth or shiny paper, or paper that is  
highly textured  
–
–
Coated, damaged or wrinkled paper  
Paper with foreign objects attached, such as tabs  
or staples  
–
–
Paper that has dust, lint or oil stains  
Paper that will melt, vaporize, discolor, scorch or  
emit dangerous fumes near 200 °C (392 °F), such  
as vellum paper. These materials may transfer  
onto the fusing roller and cause damage.  
–
–
Moist paper  
Inkjet paper  
R Some paper is designed to be printed on only one  
side. Try printing on the other side of the paper if you  
are not happy with the print quality, or if misfeeding  
occurs.  
R For proper paper feeding and best print quality, we  
recommend using long-grained paper.  
R Do not use paper of different types or thicknesses at  
the same time. This may cause paper jams.  
R Avoid double-sided printing.  
R Do not use paper printed from this unit for  
double-sided printing with other copiers or printers.  
This may cause paper jams.  
R To avoid curling, do not open paper packs until you  
are ready to use the paper. Store unused paper in the  
original packaging, in a cool and dry location.  
R For customers who live in high humidity areas:  
Please be sure to store paper in an air-conditioned  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
   
1. Introduction and Installation  
3 Load the paper, print-side up (B).  
5 Insert the paper input tray into the base unit, lifting  
the front part of the tray. Then push it completely into  
the base unit.  
Important:  
R Push down to lock the plate (C) in the paper  
input tray, if necessary.  
B
C
Note:  
R If the paper is not loaded correctly, re-adjust the  
paper guides, or the paper may jam.  
4 Adjust the recording paper guides. Pinch the front  
side of the recording paper guide (D), then slide it to  
match the paper size mark. Pinch the right side of the  
recording paper guide (E), then slide it to adjust the  
width to the size of the recording paper.  
R If the paper input tray does not close, the plate in the  
paper input tray may not be in the locked position.  
Push the paper down and make sure that the paper  
is laying flat in the paper input tray.  
R Make sure that the recording paper is under the  
paper limit mark (F), and the paper should not  
be loaded over the snubbers (G).  
Caution for the paper input tray  
R Do not drop the paper input tray.  
F
E
R Hold the paper input tray with both hands when  
removing or installing. The paper input tray  
weighs approximately 2 kg (4.4 lb) when fully  
loaded with recording paper.  
G
D
Approx. 2 kg (4.4 lb)  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
1. Introduction and Installation  
1.9.1 Manual input tray  
1.10 Handset unit  
Important:  
You can use the manual input tray for printing with the  
computer and for copying. It can hold one page at a time.  
When printing or copying multiple pages, add the next  
page after the first page has been fed into the base unit.  
R Please refer to page 138 for information on recording  
paper.  
R Before installing or removing the handset unit, be  
sure to turn the power switch OFF.  
1 Connect the handset cord (A).  
R The unit is set for printing letter-size plain paper  
by default.  
–
To use other paper sizes, change the  
recording paper size setting (feature #381 on  
page 81).  
–
To use thin paper, change the recording paper  
type setting (feature #384 on page 81).  
1 Adjust the width of the guides (A) to the size of the  
recording paper.  
A
2 Insert the paper, print-side down (B) until the base  
unit grasps the paper and a single beep is heard.  
2 Connect the handset connector (B).  
R Remove the seal from the handset unit  
connection jack if attached.  
B
B
A
Note:  
R To print from the manual input tray;  
–
when printing with the computer, select #2 for the  
printer properties.  
–
when making a copy, set the copy input tray  
setting to “#2” beforehand (feature #460 on  
page 90).  
If these settings are not changed, when printing or  
copying multiple pages, the 1st page will be printed  
from the manual input tray, but the rest of the pages  
will be printed from the paper input tray.  
R If the paper is not inserted correctly, re-adjust the  
paper, or the paper may jam.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
       
1. Introduction and Installation  
3 Insert the tab (C) and rib (D).  
To remove the handset unit  
1. Pull the handset unit slightly forward (A), then lift it  
in the direction of the arrow (B) to remove the rib.  
B
A
C
2. Remove the tab (C), then disconnect the handset  
connector (D).  
D
D
C
1.11 Battery installation /  
replacement (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
Caution:  
Important:  
R When moving the base unit, be sure to hold by  
R USE ONLY Ni-MH batteries AAA (R03) size.  
Do NOT use alkaline/Manganese/Ni-Cd batteries  
etc.  
the grip. Do not hold by the handset unit.  
Correct  
Incorrect  
R Use the supplied rechargeable batteries. For  
replacement, we recommend using the  
Panasonic rechargeable batteries noted on  
page 7.  
Note:  
R While talking to the other party, you can send a fax  
using the scanner glass by pressing MStartN, and  
then M1N (To receive a fax, press M2N).  
R Wipe the battery ends (  
,
) with a dry cloth.  
R Avoid touching the battery ends (  
,
) or the  
unit contacts.  
R Confirm correct polarities (  
R Install the batteries without touching the battery  
ends ( ) or the unit contacts.  
,
).  
,
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19  
   
1. Introduction and Installation  
1 Press the notch on the cordless handset cover firmly,  
and slide the cover.  
1.12 Belt clip (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
R When replacing batteries, remove the old  
batteries positive ( ) terminal first.  
To attach  
2 Insert the batteries negative ( ) terminal first. Close  
the cordless handset cover.  
To remove  
Attention:  
A nickel metal hydride battery that is recyclable powers  
the product you have purchased.  
Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY (1-800-822-8837) for  
information on how to recycle this battery.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
   
2. Preparation  
R If any other device is connected to the same  
telephone line, this unit may disturb the network  
condition of the device.  
2.1 Connections  
2. . Preparation  
2.1.1 Base unit  
Using surge protectors  
R The warranty does not cover damage due to power  
line surges or lightning. For additional protection, we  
recommend using a surge protector (F).  
Caution:  
R When you operate this product, the power outlet  
should be near the product and easily accessible.  
Important:  
If the unit shares a single telephone line with a DSL  
service  
R See page 18 to connect the handset unit.  
Fax transmission/reception may be disturbed, noise  
interference may be heard during telephone  
conversations, or Caller ID (page 54) may not function  
properly. Please attach a DSL filter (G) to the telephone  
line cord of the unit to prevent this. A DSL filter may be  
provided by your DSL service provider.  
A
F
B
E
C
D
G
Power cord  
R Connect to a power outlet  
Using network router/network hub  
(120 V, 60 Hz).  
R We recommend using network routers/network hubs  
(D) under secure network environments. Consult  
your network administrator for firewall settings, etc.  
Telephone line cord  
R Connect to a single telephone line jack (RJ11C).  
To the Internet  
R The warranty does not cover damage due to security  
problems or any inconveniences relating to it.  
Network router/Network hub (not supplied)  
R Also connect networked computers.  
LAN cable (not supplied)  
2.1.2 Charger unit (KX-MB2060 optional)  
AC adaptor  
R To assure continued emission limit compliance,  
use only shielded LAN cable (Category 5 (Cat-5)  
Ethernet cable).  
R Connect to a power outlet (120 V, 60 Hz).  
Hooks  
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE USB  
CONNECTION  
R Fasten the AC adaptor cord to prevent it from  
being disconnected.  
R DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A  
COMPUTER WITH THE USB CABLE UNTIL  
PROMPTED TO DO SO DURING THE SETUP  
OF MULTI-FUNCTION STATION (page 31).  
Note:  
R Do not place any objects within 10 cm (4 inches) of  
the right, left and back sides of the base unit.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21  
   
2. Preparation  
Screws (not supplied)  
2.2 Battery charge (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
R The charger can be mounted on the wall, if  
required.  
Place the cordless handset on the charger for about 7  
hours before initial use. Confirm “Charging” is  
displayed.  
25.4 mm  
(1 inch)  
When the batteries are fully charged, the charge  
indicator (A) goes OFF and “Fully charged” is  
displayed.  
C
B
A
B
A
Caution:  
R USE ONLY WITH the supplied Panasonic AC  
adaptor.  
R The AC adaptor must remain connected at all  
times. (It is normal for the adaptor to feel warm  
during use.)  
R The AC adaptor should be connected to a  
vertically oriented or floor-mounted AC outlet. Do  
not connect the AC adaptor to a ceiling-mounted  
AC outlet, as the weight of the adaptor may cause  
it to become disconnected.  
C
R Press the AC adaptor plug firmly.  
Note:  
R It is normal for the cordless handset to feel warm  
during charging.  
R Clean the charge contacts of the cordless handset  
(B) and charger (C) with a soft and dry cloth once  
a month. Clean more often if the unit is exposed to  
grease, dust, or high humidity.  
Battery level  
Icon  
Battery level  
High  
Medium  
Low  
Needs charging.  
Empty  
Panasonic Ni-MH battery performance (supplied  
batteries)  
Operation  
Operating time  
*1  
In continuous use  
Not in use (standby)  
13 hours max.  
*1  
11 days max.  
*1 If Eco mode is on.  
Note:  
R Actual battery performance depends on usage and  
ambient environment.  
R Even after the cordless handset is fully charged, the  
cordless handset can be left on the charger without  
any ill effect on the batteries.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
           
2. Preparation  
R The battery level may not be displayed correctly after  
you replace the batteries. In this case, place the  
cordless handset on the charger and let it charge for  
at least 7 hours.  
2.4 Turning the power ON  
Turn the power switch to the ON position (A).  
2.3 Intelligent eco mode  
(KX-MB2060 optional)  
A
This feature automatically reduces cordless handset  
power consumption by suppressing cordless handset  
transmission power when the cordless handset is close  
to the base unit.  
R When this feature is activated,  
is displayed.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23  
       
2. Preparation  
2.5 Dialing mode for the base unit, 2.6 Selecting the operation mode  
and cordless handset  
(KX-MB2060 optional)  
(Scan/Copy/Fax)  
You can select the desired mode by pressing one of the  
following buttons.  
If you cannot dial (page 49, 57), change this setting  
according to your telephone line service.  
MSetN  
MMenuN  
1
MMenuN  
–
–
–
MScanN: Select this mode when using the unit as a  
scanner (page 37).  
MCopyN: Select this mode when using the unit as a  
copier (page 42).  
2 Press MBNM1NM2NM0N to display “DIALING MODE”.  
3 Press M1N or M2N to select the desired setting.  
M1N “PULSE”: For rotary/pulse dial service.  
M2N “TONE” (default): For tone dial service.  
MFaxN: Select this mode when using the unit as a fax  
machine (page 57).  
4
MSetN  
Note:  
5 Press MMenuN to exit.  
R The default operation mode is the copy mode.  
R You can change the default operation mode (feature  
#463 on page 81) and the timer before returning to  
the default operation mode (feature #464 on  
page 81).  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
     
2. Preparation  
2.7.2 Using the automatic document feeder  
2.7 Setting the original  
A
2.7.1 Using the scanner glass  
A
1 Insert the document (up to 20 pages) FACE UP into  
the feeder until a single beep is heard.  
B
2 Adjust the width of the document guides (A) to fit the  
actual size of the document.  
1 Open the document cover (A).  
Note:  
R Confirm that there are no documents on the scanner  
2 Place the document FACE DOWN on the scanner  
glass.  
glass (B), aligning the top left of the document with  
the corner where the  
mark is positioned.  
R Confirm that any ink, paste or correction fluid has  
dried completely.  
R Remove clips, staples or other fasteners.  
R Do not insert the following types of documents (Make  
a copy of the document using the scanner glass and  
set the copy instead.):  
3 Close the document cover.  
Note:  
R Confirm that there are no documents in the automatic  
document feeder.  
R Place the original onto the scanner glass gently. To  
–
Chemically treated paper such as carbon or  
carbonless duplicating paper  
avoid malfunction, do not press down too firmly.  
R If the original is a thick book, do not close the  
document cover.  
R Confirm that any ink, paste or correction fluid has  
dried completely.  
R Effective scanning area is shown by the shaded area:  
–
–
–
–
Electrostatically charged paper  
Badly curled, creased or torn paper  
Paper with a coated surface  
Paper with printing on the opposite side that can  
be seen through the other side, such as newsprint  
Effective scanning area  
R The total height of the documents when laid flat, must  
5
be less than 4 mm ( /32"). If the documents exceed  
4 mm  
(5/32")  
the capacity of the automatic document feeder, they  
may fall or cause a jam in the feeder.  
R To set a document with a width of less than 210 mm  
208 mm  
(8 3/16")  
1
(8 /4"), we recommend using the scanner glass to  
copy the original document onto A4 or letter-size  
paper, then setting the copied document for better  
results.  
4 mm  
(5/32")  
R Do not set documents that do not satisfy the  
requirements of size and weight. Make a copy of the  
document using the scanner glass and set the copy.  
4 mm  
(5/32")  
289 mm  
(11 3/8")  
4 mm  
(5/32")  
R Available document size, document weight and  
effective scanning area are as follows:  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
25  
           
2. Preparation  
Minimum document size  
2.8 Help function  
The unit contains helpful information, which can be  
printed for reference.  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
“BASIC SETTINGS”  
“FEATURE LIST”  
“PHONEBOOK”  
“TAM OPERATION”  
“FAX SND/RCV”  
“COPIER”  
128 mm  
(5")  
Maximum document size  
“Q and A”  
“ERRORS”  
“REPORTS”  
“CALLER ID”  
MSetN  
216 mm  
(8 1/2")  
Effective scanning area  
4 mm  
4 mm  
(
5/32"  
)
)
MMenuN MFNMEN  
1 Press MMenuN repeatedly to display “HELP”.  
2 Press MFN or MEN repeatedly to display the desired  
item. A MSetN  
(
5/32"  
3 Press MMenuN to exit.  
4 mm  
(
5/32"  
)
4 mm ( )  
5/32"  
208 mm (8 3/16"  
)
216 mm (8 1/2")  
R Shaded area will be scanned.  
R When using the unit as a scanner (page 37,  
40), the effective scanning length depends on  
the selected paper size.  
Document weight  
R Single sheet:  
2
2
60 g/m to 75 g/m (16 lb to 20 lb)  
R Multiple sheets:  
2
2
60 g/m to 75 g/m (16 lb to 20 lb)  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
                       
2. Preparation  
3. Press MCN or MDN to select “Ringer setting”.  
A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
2.9 Adjusting the volume  
4. Press MCN or MDN to select “Ringer volume”. A  
MSELECTN (soft key A)  
2.9.1 Base unit  
5. Press MCN or MDN to select the desired volume. A  
Important:  
MSAVEN (soft key A) A MOFFN  
R Before adjusting the volume, set the operation  
mode to fax mode. If the MFaxN light is OFF, turn  
it ON by pressing MFaxN.  
Note:  
R When receiving a call, you can adjust the ringer  
volume by pressing MCN or MDN.  
MSetN  
R When the ringer volume is turned OFF, is  
displayed and the cordless handset does not ring for  
outside calls.  
However even when the ringer volume is set to OFF,  
the cordless handset rings:  
–
at the low level for alarm (page 103) and intercom  
calls (page 104)  
–
at the high level for paging (page 104)  
MFaxN  
Ringer volume  
MCNMDN  
Cordless handset receiver volume  
While using the receiver, press MCN or MDN.  
Speaker volume  
While the unit is idle, press MCN or MDN.  
While using the speakerphone, press MCN or MDN.  
To turn the ringer OFF  
Press MCN repeatedly to display “RINGER OFF= OK?”.  
A MSetN  
R The base unit will not ring for outside calls.  
The base unit will ring at the low level for intercom  
calls.  
R To turn the ringer back ON, press MDN.  
Handset receiver volume  
While using the receiver, press MCN or MDN.  
Monitor volume  
While using the monitor, press MCN or MDN.  
2.9.2 Cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
A
MOFFN  
MCNMDN  
Ringer volume  
1. MMENUN (soft key A)  
2. Press MCN or MDN to select “Initial setting”.  
A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
27  
           
2. Preparation  
R If the time has not previously been set, Caller ID will  
not adjust the clock.  
R You can turn this feature OFF (feature #226 on  
2.10 Date and time  
We recommend you to set the date and time. The other  
party will receive your unit’s date and time as the header  
information.  
page 80).  
2.10.2 With the cordless handset  
(KX-MB2060 optional)  
2.10.1 With the base unit  
MSetN  
A
MOFFN  
MFNMEN  
MFaxN  
MMenuN MFNMEN  
1
MMenuN A MBNM1NM0NM1N A MSetN  
1
MMENUN (soft key A) A M#NM1NM0NM1N  
2 Enter the current month/date/year by selecting 2  
digits for each.  
2 Enter the current month/date/year by selecting 2  
digits for each.  
Example: August 3, 2010  
Example: August 3, 2010  
M0NM8N M0NM3N M1NM0N  
M0NM8N M0NM3N M1NM0N  
3 Enter the current hour/minute by selecting 2 digits for  
each.  
3
MOKN (soft key A)  
Example: 10:15 PM (12 hour clock format)  
4 Enter the current hour/minute by selecting 2 digits for  
each.  
1. M1NM0N M1NM5N  
Example: 10:15 PM (12 hour clock format)  
2. Press MGN repeatedly to select “PM”.  
1. M1NM0N M1NM5N  
4
MSetN  
2. Press MAM/PMN (soft key A) repeatedly to select  
5 Press MMenuN to exit.  
“PM”.  
Note:  
5
MSAVEN (soft key A)  
R To check the current date and time setting, press  
6 Press MOFFN to exit.  
MFaxN to temporarily change the unit to the fax mode.  
R Your unit’s date and time will be used as the header  
Note:  
information for the following:  
R If you select Spanish for the language (feature #110  
–
When sending as an attached file to an email  
destination directly from this unit (Scan to email  
address) (page 38).  
on page 103), the time is set using a 24 hour clock.  
Example: 15:15  
Press M1NM5NM1NM5N.  
–
When sending faxes (page 57).  
R If the date and time is not set correctly, the other party  
will receive an incorrect date and time as their  
header. This may confuse the other party.  
To correct a mistake  
Press MFN or MEN to move the cursor to the incorrect  
number, and make the correction.  
R If you select Spanish for the language (feature #110  
on page 78), the time is set using a 24 hour clock.  
Example: 15:15  
Press M1NM5NM1NM5N.  
To correct a mistake  
Press MFN or MEN to move the cursor to the incorrect  
number, and make the correction.  
If you have subscribed to a Caller ID service  
The date and time will be automatically set according to  
the received caller information.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
     
2. Preparation  
2.11 Your logo  
You can program your logo (name, company name, etc.)  
2.12 Your fax number  
You can program your fax number so that it appears on  
so that it appears on the top of each page sent.  
the top of each page sent.  
MSetN  
MStopN  
MSetN  
MStopN  
MMenuN MFNMEN  
MFlashN MMenuN MFNMEN  
1
MMenuN A MBNM1NM0NM2N A MSetN  
1
MMenuN A MBNM1NM0NM3N A MSetN  
2 Enter your logo, up to 30 characters (see page 106  
2 Enter your fax number, up to 20 digits.  
R To enter a “+”, press MGN.  
for character entry). A MSetN  
R To enter a space, press MBN.  
R To enter a hyphen, press MFlashN.  
R To erase a number, press MStopN.  
3 Press MMenuN to exit.  
To correct a mistake  
Press MFN or MEN to move the cursor to the incorrect  
character, and make the correction.  
R To erase all characters, press and hold MStopN.  
3
MSetN  
4 Press MMenuN to exit.  
To correct a mistake  
Press MFN or MEN to move the cursor to the incorrect  
number, and make the correction.  
R To erase all numbers, press and hold MStopN.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
29  
       
2. Preparation  
For the default gateway:  
2.13 Configuring the unit to  
access the LAN  
You can use printer, scanner, fax, telephone answering  
machine features using a computer connected to the  
LAN. To enable these features, you need to set the IP  
address, subnet mask, and default gateway in the unit.  
1. Press M5NM0NM3N to display “DEFAULT  
GATEWAY”. A MSetN  
2. Enter the default gateway of the network. A  
MSetN  
5 Press MMenuN to exit.  
6 Install Multi-Function Station on the computer that  
you want to use it with. See page 31 for details.  
Important:  
R Consult your network administrator when setting  
the IP address, subnet mask, and default  
gateway.  
To correct a mistake in the IP address, subnet mask,  
or default gateway  
Press MFN or MEN to move the cursor to the incorrect  
number, and make the correction.  
2.13.1 Setting up automatically with a DHCP  
server  
2.13.3 Setting the computer for PC fax  
reception  
Your situation:  
–
When only one unit is connected to the LAN.  
You need to select the computer that will be used for  
receiving faxes.  
If your network administrator manages the network with  
a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server,  
it will automatically assign an IP (Internet Protocol)  
address, subnet mask, and default gateway to the unit.  
Important:  
R Make sure the PC fax setting is set to “ALWAYS”  
or “CONNECTED” beforehand (feature #442 on  
page 86).  
1 After connecting the LAN cable to the unit and the  
computer, turn the power switch ON.  
R The IP address, subnet mask, and default  
gateway will be set automatically.  
R Make sure the fax preview mode is turned OFF  
beforehand (feature #448 on page 66).  
2 Install Multi-Function Station on the computer that  
1
MMenuN A MBNM4NM4NM3N A MSetN  
you want to use it with. See page 31 for details.  
2 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the desired  
computer.  
Note:  
R You can connect two or more units and assign IP  
addresses automatically with a DHCP server, but we  
recommend assigning static IP addresses manually  
for each unit to avoid network access and  
configuration troubles.  
R You can display IP address of the selected  
computer by pressing MEN.  
3
MSetN  
4 Press MMenuN to exit.  
Note:  
2.13.2 Setting up manually  
R If the unit is not connected to the LAN, the computer  
connected to the unit by USB is assigned as the  
default computer for PC fax reception.  
Your situation:  
–
When your network administrator does not manage  
the network with a DHCP server.  
R To select the desired computer easily, change the PC  
–
When two or more units are connected to the LAN.  
name beforehand (page 34).  
You need to assign an IP address, subnet mask, and  
default gateway manually.  
2.13.4 Setting the computer for PC TAM  
reception  
1
MMenuN  
2 Press MBNM5NM0NM0N to display “DHCP”.  
You need to select the computer that will be used for  
receiving voice messages.  
3 Press M0N to select “DISABLED”. A MSetN  
Important:  
4 Set each item.  
R Make sure the PC TAM setting is set to  
“ALWAYS” beforehand (feature #365 on  
page 88).  
For the IP address:  
1. Press M5NM0NM1N to display “IP ADDRESS”. A  
MSetN  
1
MMenuN A MBNM3NM6NM6N A MSetN  
2. Enter the IP address of the unit. A MSetN  
2 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the desired  
computer.  
For the subnet mask:  
1. Press M5NM0NM2N to display “SUBNET MASK”.  
R You can display IP address of the selected  
computer by pressing MEN.  
A MSetN  
2. Enter the subnet mask of the network. A MSetN  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
         
2. Preparation  
3
MSetN  
2.14 Installing Multi-Function  
Station  
4 Press MMenuN to exit.  
Note:  
R If the unit is not connected to the LAN, the computer  
connected to the unit by USB is assigned as the  
default computer for PC TAM reception.  
2.14.1 Required computer environment  
Panasonic Multi-Function Station software enables the  
base unit to carry out the following functions:  
R To select the desired computer easily, change the PC  
name beforehand (page 34).  
–
–
Printing on plain paper, thin paper and labels  
Previewing documents and changing printer settings  
before printing (Easy Print Utility)  
–
–
Scanning documents and converting an image into  
text with Readiris OCR software  
®
Scanning from other applications for Microsoft  
®
Windows that support TWAIN scanning and WIA  
®
scanning (Windows XP/Windows Vista /Windows 7,  
USB connection only)  
–
Storing, editing or erasing items in the phonebook  
using your computer  
–
–
Programming the features using your computer  
Sending, receiving fax documents using your  
computer  
–
Listening to voice messages on your computer (PC  
TAM)  
To use Multi-Function Station on your computer, the  
following are required:  
Operating System:  
Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows 7  
CPU:  
®
Windows 2000: Pentium P or higher processor  
Windows XP: Pentium Q or higher processor  
Windows Vista/Windows 7: Pentium 4 or higher  
processor  
RAM:  
Windows 2000/Windows XP: 128 MB (256 MB or more  
recommended)  
Windows Vista: 512 MB (1 GB or more recommended)  
Windows 7: 1 GB (2 GB or more recommended)  
Other Hardware:  
CD-ROM drive  
Hard disk drive with at least 200 MB of available space  
USB interface  
LAN interface (10Base-T/100Base-TX)  
Other:  
®
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later  
Audio output  
Warning:  
R To assure continued emission limit compliance:  
–
use only shielded USB cable (Example:  
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 certified cable).  
–
use only shielded LAN cable (Category 5  
(Cat-5) Ethernet cable).  
R To protect the unit, use only shielded USB cable  
in areas where thunderstorms occur.  
R To use Easy Print Utility on your computer, the  
following are required:  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
31  
   
2. Preparation  
–
Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 and Security  
2. Connect the unit to a computer with the USB cable  
update for Windows 2000 (KB835732).  
Install KB835732 from Microsoft download  
site before installing Easy Print Utility.  
(A), then click [Next].  
–
Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later.  
Note:  
R A USB cable is not supplied. Please purchase a  
shielded Type-A male/Type-B male USB cable.  
2.14.2 Installing Multi-Function Station on a  
computer  
A
R Install Multi-Function Station (CD-ROM) before  
connecting the unit to a computer with the USB  
cable. If the unit is connected to a computer with  
the USB cable before installing Multi-Function  
Station, the [Found New Hardware Wizard] dialog  
box will appear. Click [Cancel] to close it.  
R If the unit is connected to your computer, the  
model name will be automatically detected.  
R You can change the name of the unit if necessary.  
3. Click [Install], then follow the on-screen instructions.  
R The screenshots shown in these instructions are  
for Windows XP and are included for reference  
only.  
R The screenshots shown in these instructions  
may differ slightly from those of the actual  
product.  
R Software features and appearance are subject to  
change without notice.  
R If you are also using KX-MB200/KX-MB700/  
R The files will be copied to your computer.  
For LAN connection:  
1. [Connect via the Network.] A [Next]  
R The [Select a Network Device] dialog box will  
appear.  
2. Check [Select from the search list] and select the  
unit from the list.  
R If the name of the desired unit is not displayed on  
the list, and the IP address for the unit has been  
assigned, check [Direct input] and enter the IP  
address.  
KX-FLB880 series, see page 124.  
1 Start Windows and exit all other applications.  
R You must be logged in as an administrator in  
order to install Multi-Function Station.  
3. [Next]  
2 Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM  
drive.  
R You can change the name of the unit if necessary.  
4. Click [Install], then follow the on-screen instructions.  
R If the [Select Language] dialog box appears,  
select the language that you want to use with this  
software. Click [OK].  
R The files will be copied to your computer.  
Important notice  
R If the installation does not start automatically:  
Click [Start]. Choose [Run...]. Type “D:\Install”  
(where “D” is the drive letter of your CD-ROM  
drive). Click [OK].  
If you are using Windows XP, Windows Vista or  
Windows 7, a message may appear after connecting  
the unit with the USB cable. This is normal and the  
software will not cause any difficulties with your  
operating system. You can continue the installation  
with no problem. This kind of message is displayed:  
R For Windows XP users  
(If you are not sure what the drive letter is for your  
CD-ROM drive, use Windows Explorer and look  
for the CD-ROM drive.)  
“The software you are installing for this hardware  
has not passed Windows Logo testing to verify its  
compatibility with Windows XP.”  
3 [Easy Installation]  
R The installation will start automatically.  
4 When the setup program starts, follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
R For Windows Vista/Windows 7 users  
“Would you like to install this device software?”  
R Easy Print Utility (page 36), Readiris OCR  
software (page 38) and Device Monitor  
(page 107) will also be installed.  
To view or install the operating instructions data  
1. Start Windows and insert the supplied CD-ROM into  
5 The [Connection Type] dialog box appears.  
your CD-ROM drive.  
For USB connection:  
2. Click [Operating Instructions], then follow the  
on-screen instructions to view or install the operating  
instructions in PDF format.  
1. [Connect directly with a USB cable.] A [Next]  
R The [Connect Device] dialog box will appear.  
®
®
R Adobe Reader is required to view the operating  
instructions.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
     
2. Preparation  
Note:  
2.15 Starting Multi-Function  
Station  
R If the screen prompts you to insert the CD-ROM for  
the operating system when installing Multi-Function  
Station, insert it into your CD-ROM drive.  
[Start] A [All Programs] or [Programs] A  
[Panasonic] A the unit’s name A [Multi-Function  
Station]  
R If you install the operating instructions, you can view  
it anytime by clicking [ ] on the Multi-Function  
Station launcher.  
R Multi-Function Station will appear.  
To use another unit with the computer  
You need to add the printer driver for each unit, as  
follows.  
1. Start Windows and insert the supplied CD-ROM into  
your CD-ROM drive.  
2. [Modify] A [Add Multi-Function Station Driver].  
Then follow the on-screen instructions.  
Note:  
R You cannot connect more than one unit to the same  
computer at the same time (USB connection only).  
To modify the software (To add or uninstall each  
component)  
You can select the components to install or uninstall  
anytime after the installation.  
You must be logged in as an administrator in order to  
modify Multi-Function Station.  
[Scan] (page 40)  
1. Start Windows and insert the supplied CD-ROM into  
R To scan and display the scanned images.  
R To scan and create an image file.  
R To scan and send by email.  
your CD-ROM drive.  
2. [Modify] A [Modify Utilities]. Then follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
R To scan and convert an image into editable text data.  
To uninstall the software  
[PC FAX]  
You must be logged in as an administrator in order to  
uninstall Multi-Function Station.  
R To send a document created on the computer as a  
fax message (page 61).  
[Start] A [All Programs] or [Programs] A  
[Panasonic] A the unit’s name A [Uninstall]. Then  
follow the on-screen instructions.  
R To display a fax document received on the computer  
(page 65).  
[Remote Control] (page 107)  
R To program the features.  
R To store, edit or erase items in base unit’s  
phonebook.  
R To view items in the journal report or Caller ID list.  
R To store caller information into base unit’s  
phonebook.  
R To store or erase items for broadcast transmission.  
[Utilities]  
R To start the Multi-Function Viewer (page 40).  
R To start the PC TAM application (page 72).  
R To start the Device Monitor (page 107).  
R To start the OCR application (page 38).  
R To start the configuration web page (page 77,  
107) (LAN connection only).  
[Settings] (page 34)  
R To change the general settings.  
R To change the settings for scanning.  
[
]
R For detailed instructions on Multi-Function Station.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33  
     
2. Preparation  
R To view operating instructions.  
For Windows XP:  
1. [Start] A [Control Panel] A [Internet Options]  
[
]
A [Programs] A [E-mail]  
R To display usage tips.  
2. Select the desired MAPI-compliant Email software  
[
]
such as [Outlook Express], etc. A [OK]  
R To display information about Multi-Function Station.  
For Windows Vista:  
Note:  
1. [Start] A [Control Panel] A [Internet Options]  
A [Programs] A [Set programs] A [Set  
program access and computer defaults]  
R If the [User Account Control] dialog box  
appears, click [Continue].  
R You can confirm if the unit is connected to your  
computer by using Device Monitor (page 107).  
R Computer features (printing, scanning, etc.) may not  
function properly in the following situations:  
–
–
–
When the unit is connected to a computer that  
was custom-built by the user.  
When the unit is connected to the computer via a  
PCI card or other expansion card.  
When the unit is connected to another piece of  
hardware (such as a USB hub or interface  
adapter) and not connected directly to the  
computer.  
2. [Custom]  
3. Select the desired MAPI-compliant Email software  
such as [Windows Mail], etc. from [Choose a  
default e-mail program]. A [OK]  
For Windows 7:  
1. [Start] A [Control Panel] A [Network and  
Internet] A [Internet Options] A [Programs]  
A [Set programs] A [Set program access and  
computer defaults]  
To change the settings  
2. [Custom]  
You can change the settings for Multi-Function Station  
beforehand.  
3. Select the desired MAPI-compliant Email software  
from [Choose a default e-mail program]. A [OK]  
1. Select [Settings] from Multi-Function Station.  
2. Click the desired tab and change the settings. A  
[OK]  
[General]  
–
[Launcher display setting]: To select the display  
type of the launcher.  
–
–
[OCR Path]: To select the OCR software.  
[PC name list up on device] (LAN connection only):  
To select whether or not your computer name is  
displayed on the base unit.  
–
[PC name] (LAN connection only): The computer  
name that will be displayed on the base unit.  
[Scan]  
–
[Save to]: To select the folder where the scanned  
image will be saved.  
–
[Viewer][File][Email][OCR][Custom]: To change  
scanning settings for Multi-Function scan application.  
Note:  
R Assign a unique name for the [PC name] to avoid  
errors, or the scanned image may be sent to the  
incorrect computer.  
To select the default Email software  
The default Email software is used when using  
“4.1.3 Scan to Email”, page 38.  
You can select the default Email software as follows.  
For Windows 2000:  
1. [Start] A [Settings] A [Control Panel] A  
[Internet Options] A [Programs] A [E-mail]  
2. Select the desired MAPI-compliant Email software  
such as [Outlook Express], etc. A [OK]  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
     
3. Printer  
Setting the printer properties  
3.1 Printing from Windows  
applications  
You can print a file created in a Windows application. For  
example, to print from WordPad, proceed as follows:  
You can change the printer setting in step 3. We  
recommend that you test paper (especially special sizes  
and types of paper) on the unit before purchasing large  
quantities.  
You can change or display the settings on the following  
tabs.  
3. . Printer  
1 Open the document you want to print.  
[Basic]: Paper size, media type, pages per sheet, etc.  
[Output]: Number of prints, collate, etc.  
[Quality]: Quality, contrast, toner save feature, etc.  
[Effects]: Watermark, overlay.  
[Profile]: Saving the desired settings, selecting the  
saved settings, etc.  
2 Select [Print...] from the [File] menu.  
R The [Print] dialog box will appear.  
For details about the [Print] dialog box, click [?],  
then click the desired item.  
[Support]: Version information.  
Note:  
R Select the desired media type on the [Basic] tab  
according to the recording paper.  
Recording paper type  
Plain paper  
Media type  
[Plain Paper]  
2
2
75 g/m to 90 g/m  
(20 lb to 24 lb)  
Thin paper  
[Thin Paper]  
[Label]  
2
2
64 g/m to 75 g/m  
(17 lb to 20 lb)  
Label  
Note:  
®
R For Microsoft PowerPoint , select [Color] or  
R When printing from a computer, the printer properties  
setting overrides the following unit’s programming  
features:  
remove the check next to [Grayscale] in the print  
dialog so that colored or gray objects will be  
printed in grayscale properly.  
–
Media type setting (feature #383 and feature  
#384 on page 81)  
3 Select the unit’s name as the active printer.  
R If you have changed the name of the unit when  
installing, select that name from the list.  
–
Toner save setting (feature #482 on page 82)  
To print on labels  
R To change the printer settings, proceed as  
follows.  
You can print not only on plain paper but also on special  
media (labels).  
R Please refer to page 138 for information on recording  
For Windows 2000:  
Click the desired tab and change the printer  
settings.  
For Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows 7:  
Click [Preferences], then click the desired tab.  
Change the printer settings, then click [OK].  
paper.  
R To load paper, see page 18.  
Use labels designed for laser printing. We recommend  
the following:  
®
Avery  
4 Click [Print].  
R The unit will start printing.  
5160/5161/5162/5163/5164/5165/5167/5168  
®
Note:  
XEROX  
R To stop printing from the base unit, see page 108.  
R To load paper, see page 16, 18.  
LWH100/LWH110/LWH120/LWH130/LWH140  
R Use the manual input tray to print labels.  
R For details about the paper specifications, see  
R Load label sheets one page at a time for printing,  
page 138.  
print-side down.  
R If a printing error occurs, the Device Monitor  
(page 107) will start automatically and display the  
error information.  
R Remove each label after printing.  
R Do not use the following types of labels:  
–
Labels that are wrinkled, damaged or separated  
from the backing sheet.  
–
Any sheet of labels that has spaces in it where  
some of the labels have been removed.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Printer  
–
Labels that do not completely cover the backing  
sheet as follows:  
6 Click [Print] icon on the print toolbar.  
R The unit will start printing.  
3.2.1 Ecology printing features  
You can use various printing features and preview the  
print image without test print.  
Printer settings  
You can change or display the settings on the following  
tabs in step 5.  
[Basic]: Paper size, layout printing  
[Output]: Number of prints, paper source, media type  
[Quality]: Color mode, toner save  
3.2 Easy Print Utility  
By printing using the Panasonic Easy Print Utility instead  
of the printer driver, you can use useful printing features  
for your convenience.  
[Effects]: Header, watermark, footer  
Combining multiple documents  
You can display multiple pages created in various  
applications and handle it as a single document.  
–
Preventing unnecessary prints by checking the  
preview on PC screen  
1. Perform step 1 to 4 on “3.2 Easy Print Utility”.  
–
–
Combining multiple documents  
Saving a file in PDF format  
2. Open another document you want to add to Easy  
Print Utility.  
For example, to print from WordPad, proceed as follows:  
3. Select [Print...] from the [File] menu.  
1 Open the document you want to print.  
R The [Print] dialog box will appear.  
2 Select [Print...] from the [File] menu.  
4. Select [Panasonic Easy Print Driver] as the active  
3 Select [Panasonic Easy Print Driver] as the active  
printer.  
printer.  
5. Click [Print].  
R The document will be added after the last page of  
the previous document in the print preview  
window.  
4 Click [Print].  
R The [Panasonic Easy Print Utility] dialog will be  
displayed. For details about the Easy Print Utility,  
click [ ], then click the desired item.  
6. Repeat step 2 to 5.  
7. If necessary, change the printer settings (page 36).  
8. Click [Print] icon on the print toolbar.  
5 View the print image by clicking the desired page in  
the print page window (left column list).  
Note:  
R The maximum number of documents that can be  
displayed in the [Print Page Operation] window is  
999 pages.  
Saving a file as PDF file  
You can save the previewed files in PDF format instead  
of printing it.  
1. Perform step 1 to 4 on “3.2 Easy Print Utility”.  
2. Click the [Save PDF file] icon on the print toolbar.  
R The [Save As] dialog box appears.  
3. Specify the folder to save, enter the file name, and  
then click [Save]. The [Save PDF file] dialog  
appears while PDF files are being created and saved.  
Note:  
R The PDF file created with Easy Print Utility is an  
image type.  
R To change the printer settings, see page 36.  
R To combine multiple documents created in  
various applications, see page 36.  
R To save the file in PDF format, see page 36.  
R Even if you set the number of prints on the original  
application beforehand, you may have to re-set it  
for the Easy Print Utility.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
4. Scanner  
For LAN connection:  
4.1 Scanning from the base unit  
(Push Scan)  
You can easily scan the document by using the operation  
panel on the base unit. You can select one of the  
following scanning modes depending on how you intend  
to use the scanned image.  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the computer to  
which you want to send the scanned image. A  
MSetN  
4. . Scanner  
5 If necessary, change the scanning settings. Press  
MEN, press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the desired  
setting. A MSetN  
R If you want to scan several pages and save as a  
single file, select TIFF or PDF as the file format.  
–
–
–
Viewing using Multi-Function Viewer (Viewer)  
Saving as a file to your computer (File)  
Sending as an attached file to an email destination  
from your computer (Email)  
6 When using the scanner glass:  
MStartN A The unit will scan 1 page. Place the next  
document on the scanner glass and press MSetN.  
Repeat this until all the documents are scanned, then  
press MStartN.  
–
–
Using OCR software (OCR)  
Sending as an attached file to an email destination  
directly from this unit (Email address)  
–
–
Sending to an FTP server (FTP)  
Sending to an SMB folder (SMB)  
When using the automatic document feeder:  
MStartN  
Note:  
R The scanned image will be displayed in the  
[Multi-Function Viewer] window after scanning.  
However, when you select PDF as a file format,  
the software that is associated to open PDF files  
will start.  
R You can set the desired scan mode for push scan  
beforehand (feature #493 on page 92).  
R When scanning a document, we recommend using  
the scanner glass rather than the automatic  
document feeder for better results.  
7 After you finish scanning, press MStopN to reset the  
R Do not open the document cover when scanning a  
settings you set in step 5.  
document with the automatic document feeder.  
Note:  
R To stop scanning, see page 108.  
R You can save the images in TIFF, JPEG, BMP or  
Station keys MScanN  
PDF formats.  
R The scanned image will be automatically saved in the  
folder selected in the [Settings] window (page 34).  
4.1.2 Scan to save as a file  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
2
MScanN  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “FILE”. A  
MSetN  
4 For USB connection:  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “USB HOST”.  
A MSetN  
MLowerN  
MStartN MStopN  
MSetNMCNMDNMEN  
For LAN connection:  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the computer to  
which you want to send the scanned image. A  
MSetN  
4.1.1 Scan to Multi-Function Viewer  
5 If necessary, change the scanning settings. Press  
MEN, press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the desired  
setting. A MSetN  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
2
MScanN  
R If you want to scan several pages and save as a  
single file, select TIFF or PDF as the file format.  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “VIEWER”.  
A MSetN  
6 When using the scanner glass:  
4 For USB connection:  
MStartN A The unit will scan 1 page. Place the next  
document on the scanner glass and press MSetN.  
Repeat this until all the documents are scanned, then  
press MStartN.  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “USB HOST”.  
A MSetN  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Scanner  
When using the automatic document feeder:  
4.1.4 Scan to OCR  
MStartN  
With OCR software, you can convert an image into text  
data that can be edited with word processing software.  
Readiris OCR software can be installed when installing  
Multi-Function Station.  
R The scanned image will be automatically saved  
in the folder selected in the [Settings] window.  
To change the folder, see page 34.  
7 After you finish scanning, press MStopN to reset the  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
settings you set in step 5.  
2
MScanN  
Note:  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “OCR”. A  
R To stop scanning, see page 108.  
R You can save the images in TIFF, JPEG, BMP or  
MSetN  
PDF formats.  
4 For USB connection:  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “USB HOST”.  
4.1.3 Scan to Email  
A MSetN  
For LAN connection:  
You can send the scanned image as an email attachment  
using email software on your computer.  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the computer to  
which you want to send the scanned image. A  
MSetN  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
2
MScanN  
5 If necessary, change the scanning settings. Press  
MEN, press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the desired  
setting. A MSetN  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “EMAIL”. A  
MSetN  
R If you want to scan several pages and save as a  
single file, select TIFF as the file format.  
4 For USB connection:  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “USB HOST”.  
A MSetN  
6 When using the scanner glass:  
MStartN A The unit will scan 1 page. Place the next  
document on the scanner glass and press MSetN.  
Repeat this until all the documents are scanned, then  
press MStartN.  
For LAN connection:  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the computer to  
which you want to send the scanned image. A  
MSetN  
When using the automatic document feeder:  
5 If necessary, change the scanning settings. Press  
MEN, press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the desired  
setting. A MSetN  
MStartN  
R The scanned image will be displayed in the OCR  
R If you want to scan several pages and save as a  
single file, select TIFF or PDF as the file format.  
window after scanning.  
7 After you finish scanning, press MStopN to reset the  
6 When using the scanner glass:  
settings you set in step 5.  
MStartN A The unit will scan 1 page. Place the next  
document on the scanner glass and press MSetN.  
Repeat this until all the documents are scanned, then  
press MStartN.  
Note:  
R To stop scanning, see page 108.  
R You can save the images in TIFF, JPEG or BMP  
formats.  
When using the automatic document feeder:  
R For detailed instructions about OCR, select [Help].  
R The scanned image will be automatically saved in the  
MStartN  
folder selected in the [Settings] window (page 34).  
R The email software will automatically start and the  
scanned image will be attached to a new email  
message.  
4.1.5 Scan to email address (LAN connection  
only)  
7 After you finish scanning, press MStopN to reset the  
settings you set in step 5.  
You can send the scanned image as an attachment  
without using email software.  
Note:  
R To select the default email software, see page 34.  
R To stop scanning, see page 108.  
R You can save the images in TIFF, JPEG or PDF  
Important:  
R Program the email server settings (page 97) and  
the email destinations (page 98) beforehand.  
formats.  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
R The scanned image will be automatically saved in the  
2
MScanN  
folder selected in the [Settings] window (page 34).  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
4. Scanner  
Using station 4-6:  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “EMAIL  
ADDRESS”. A MSetN  
Press MLowerN, then press the desired station  
key.  
4 Enter the destination email address.  
Using station 1-3:  
4. MSetN  
5. When using the scanner glass:  
Press the desired station key.  
Using station 4-6:  
Press MLowerN, then press the desired station key.  
Using navigator key:  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the desired  
destination.  
Using dial keypad:  
MStartN A The unit will scan 1 page. Place the  
next document on the scanner glass and press  
MSetN. Repeat this until all the documents are  
scanned, then press MStartN.  
When using the automatic document feeder:  
MStartN  
Press MSetN, then enter the email address using the  
dial keypad (page 106).  
4.1.6 Scan to FTP server (LAN connection  
only)  
5
MSetN  
6 If necessary, change the scanning settings. Press  
MEN, press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the desired  
setting. A MSetN  
You can send the scanned image to a folder on an FTP  
server.  
R If you want to scan several pages and save as a  
single file, select PDF as the file format.  
Important:  
R Program the FTP server settings beforehand  
(page 92).  
7 When using the scanner glass:  
MStartN A The unit will scan 1 page. Place the next  
document on the scanner glass and press MSetN.  
Repeat this until all the documents are scanned, then  
press MStartN.  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
2
MScanN  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “FTP  
SERVER”. A MSetN  
When using the automatic document feeder:  
4 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the destination  
to which you want to send the scanned image. A  
MSetN  
MStartN  
R The scanned image will be sent as an email  
attachment directly from this unit.  
5 If necessary, change the scanning settings. Press  
MEN, press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the desired  
setting. A MSetN  
8 After you finish scanning, press MStopN to reset the  
settings you set in step 6.  
R If you want to scan several pages and save as a  
single file, select PDF as the file format.  
Note:  
R To stop scanning, see page 108.  
6 When using the scanner glass:  
R You can save the images in TIFF, JPEG or PDF  
formats.  
MStartN A The unit will scan 1 page. Place the next  
document on the scanner glass and press MSetN.  
Repeat this until all the documents are scanned, then  
press MStartN.  
R You can search for an email address by initial.  
Example: “LISA”  
1. Perform steps 1 to 3 on “4.1.5 Scan to email  
address (LAN connection only)”, page 38.  
2. Press M5N repeatedly to display any name with the  
When using the automatic document feeder:  
MStartN  
initial “L” (see page 106 for character entry).  
R The scanned image will be automatically saved  
R To search for symbols, press MGN.  
3. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display “LISA”.  
R To stop the search, press MStopN.  
in the selected folder on the FTP server.  
7 After you finish scanning, press MStopN to reset the  
settings you set in step 5.  
R You can easily send scanned image to the desired  
destinations using station keys. To use this feature,  
register email addresses to station keys beforehand  
(page 98).  
Note:  
R To stop scanning, see page 108.  
R You can save the images in TIFF, JPEG or PDF  
formats.  
1. Set the original (page 25).  
2. MScanN  
R To display the scanned image, download the data to  
your computer beforehand.  
3. Using station 1-3:  
Press the desired station key.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Scanner  
4.1.7 Scan to SMB folder (LAN connection  
only)  
4.2 Scanning from a computer  
(Pull Scan)  
You can send the scanned image to a folder on the  
network.  
Note:  
R When scanning a document, we recommend using  
the scanner glass rather than the automatic  
document feeder for better results.  
Important:  
R Program the SMB folder settings beforehand  
(page 93).  
R Do not open the document cover when scanning a  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
document with the automatic document feeder.  
2
MScanN  
4.2.1 Using Multi-Function scan application  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “SMB  
By clicking an application icon, the selected application  
starts automatically after scanning.  
FOLDER”. A MSetN  
4 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the folder to  
which you want to send the scanned image. A  
MSetN  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
2 Start Multi-Function Station. A [Scan]  
5 If necessary, change the scanning settings. Press  
MEN, press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the desired  
setting. A MSetN  
3 Click the desired application icon.  
R When you click [Custom], the pre-programmed  
application starts.  
R If you want to scan several pages and save as a  
single file, select PDF as the file format.  
R To cancel scanning while the documents are  
being scanned, click [Cancel].  
6 When using the scanner glass:  
Note:  
MStartN A The unit will scan 1 page. Place the next  
document on the scanner glass and press MSetN.  
Repeat this until all the documents are scanned, then  
press MStartN.  
R You can change the scanning settings beforehand for  
each application (page 34).  
R When you point to an application icon, the scanning  
settings for that application are displayed as a tooltip.  
R The scanned image will be automatically saved in the  
When using the automatic document feeder:  
MStartN  
folder selected in the [Settings] window (page 34).  
R The scanned image will be automatically saved  
4.2.2 Using Multi-Function Viewer  
in the selected folder on the network.  
7 After you finish scanning, press MStopN to reset the  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
settings you set in step 5.  
2 Start Multi-Function Station.  
Note:  
3 [Utilities] A [Viewer]  
R To stop scanning, see page 108.  
R You can save the images in TIFF, JPEG or PDF  
R [Multi-Function Viewer] will appear.  
formats.  
4 Click the [Scan] icon in the [Multi-Function  
Viewer] window.  
R If this function does not perform properly, consult  
your network administrator. This unit’s SMB function  
does not support NTMLv2 and SMB signatures.  
R The unit’s name dialog box will appear.  
5 If necessary, change the scanning settings on your  
computer.  
R To preview the scanned image, click [Preview].  
You can drag the frame to specify the scanning  
area. If you change the scan settings, click  
[Preview] to refresh the scanned image.  
If you use the automatic document feeder, only  
the first page will be previewed. When you need  
to refresh the scanned image, set the document  
to preview again.  
6 [Scan]  
R If you preview the scanned image using the  
automatic document feeder in step 5, set the  
document again and click [Scan].  
R The scanned image will be displayed in the  
[Multi-Function Viewer] window after scanning.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
4. Scanner  
R To save the scanned image, select [Save As ...]  
from the [File] menu.  
R To cancel scanning while the documents are  
being scanned, click [Cancel].  
Note:  
R You can display images in applications that support  
TIFF, JPEG, PCX, DCX and BMP formats.  
R You can save images in TIFF, JPEG, PCX, DCX,  
BMP or PDF formats.  
R If the [Select...] button is displayed in [Target  
Device], click [Select...] to select the unit from the  
list, and then click [OK].  
The [Select...] button will not be displayed when  
there is only one printer driver installed.  
R You can move, copy and delete a file or page.  
4.2.3 Using other applications  
Multi-Function Station includes a TWAIN and WIA  
compliant scanner driver. You can also scan using other  
applications that support TWAIN or WIA scanning. For  
scanning example, proceed as follows:  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
2 Start an application that supports TWAIN or WIA  
scanning.  
3 For TWAIN scanning:  
Select [Acquire Image...] from the [File] menu.  
For WIA scanning:  
Select [From Scanner or Camera...] from the  
[File] menu.  
R The unit’s name dialog box will appear.  
4 If necessary, change the scanning settings on your  
computer. A [Scan]  
R The scanned image will be displayed in the  
application window after scanning.  
R To cancel scanning while the documents are  
being scanned, click [Cancel].  
Note:  
R Scanning from WIA compliant applications is only  
available for Windows XP, Windows Vista and  
Windows 7, and only via a USB connection.  
R Depending on the application used, the appearance  
may differ slightly.  
R If the [Select...] button is displayed in [Target  
Device] when performing TWAIN scanning, click  
[Select...] to select the unit from the list, and then  
click [OK].  
The [Select...] button will not be displayed when  
there is only one printer driver installed.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Copier  
3. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the size of  
recording paper size.  
5.1 Making a copy  
R When “#2” is selected, you can change the  
recording paper size by pressing MEN repeatedly.  
R The appropriate zoom rate will be set  
automatically. Some copying features cannot be  
used during zoom copy. See page 43 for  
details.  
5. . Copier  
5.1.1 Using the scanner glass  
4. MSetN  
To select the resolution  
1. Press MResolutionN repeatedly.  
–
–
–
“TEXT/PHOTO”: For both text and photographs.  
“TEXT”: For text only.  
“PHOTO”: For photographs, shaded drawings,  
etc.  
2. MSetN  
Note:  
R You can change the default resolution (feature #461  
MCopyN  
on page 90).  
MCopy SizeN  
To select the contrast  
MStartN MStopN  
MContrastN  
Adjust this setting depending on the darkness or  
lightness of the document. 5 levels (low to high) are  
available.  
MResolutionN MSetNMCNMDNMEN  
MAuto AnswerN  
Press MContrastN repeatedly. A MSetN  
1 If the MCopyN light is OFF, turn it ON by pressing  
Note:  
MCopyN.  
R You can hold the previous contrast setting (feature  
#462 on page 81).  
2 Set the original (page 25).  
3 If necessary, change the copy size (original  
document size and recording paper size), resolution  
and contrast according to the type of document.  
R To select the copy size, see page 42.  
R To select the resolution, see page 42.  
R To select the contrast, see page 42.  
4 If necessary, enter the number of copies (up to 99).  
5
MStartN  
R The unit will start copying.  
6 After you finish copying, press MStopN to reset the  
settings you set in step 3 and 4.  
Note:  
R To stop copying, see page 108.  
R You can change the default operation mode (feature  
#463 on page 81) and the timer before returning to  
the default operation mode (feature #464 on  
page 81).  
R If the MAuto AnswerN light is ON, the unit can receive  
faxes automatically even when in the copy mode.  
To select the copy size  
1. Press MCopy SizeN repeatedly to select “ORIGINAL  
SIZE”.  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the size of your  
original document. A MSetN  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
5. Copier  
5.1.2 Using the automatic document feeder  
5.2 More copying features  
R Make sure that the MCopyN light is ON.  
MCopyN  
5.2.1 Zoom copy (enlargement / reduction)  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
2 Press MZoomN repeatedly to select the zoom rate that  
fits the size of your document and recording paper.  
*1  
–
“ZOOM =100%”  
“50%”  
–
–
“200%”  
*1  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to change the zoom  
rate by 1 % at a time from “25%” to “400%”.  
You can also enter the desired percentage  
specifically by using the dial keys.  
MStartN MStopN  
3
MSetN  
4 If necessary, enter the number of copies (up to 99).  
1 If the MCopyN light is OFF, turn it ON by pressing  
A MStartN  
MCopyN.  
5 After you finish copying, press MStopN to reset this  
2 Set the original (page 25).  
feature.  
3 If necessary, change the copy size (original  
document size and recording paper size), resolution  
and contrast according to the type of document.  
R To select the copy size, see page 42.  
Note:  
R Zoom copy is not available for the following features:  
–
–
–
–
–
Quick ID copy feature (page 44)  
Image repeat feature (page 44)  
Poster feature (page 46)  
N in 1 feature (page 46)  
Separate N in 1 feature (page 47)  
R To select the resolution, see page 42.  
R To select the contrast, see page 42.  
4 If necessary, enter the number of copies (up to 99).  
R You can hold the previous zoom setting (feature #468  
5
MStartN  
on page 90).  
R The unit will start copying.  
R When using the scanner glass, the unit will only  
6 After you finish copying, press MStopN to reset the  
enlarge the right top corner of the document starting  
settings you set in step 3 and 4.  
from the  
mark on the unit.  
Note:  
R When using the automatic document feeder, the  
unit will only enlarge the center of the upper part of  
the document. To make an enlarged copy of the  
bottom of the document, turn the document around,  
and then make a copy.  
R To stop copying, see page 108.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
5. Copier  
Example: 150 % enlarged copy  
2. Place the next document on the scanner glass  
and press MSetN. Repeat this until you have  
scanned all pages, and then press MStartN.  
R The unit will start copying.  
Using the scanner glass (A):  
Original document  
Enlarged copy  
When using the automatic document feeder:  
MStartN  
8 After you finish copying, press MStopN to reset this  
feature.  
A
Example: Making 2 copies of a 4-page original  
document  
Using the automatic document feeder:  
4
Original document  
Enlarged copy  
3
4
2
4
1
3
3
4
2
3
2
Example: 70 % reduced copy  
1
2
1
1
Using the scanner glass (A):  
Original document  
Reduced copy  
Collated pages  
Uncollated pages  
Note:  
R The unit will store the documents into memory while  
collating the copies. If the memory becomes full while  
storing, the unit will only print out the stored pages.  
A
R You can hold the previous collate setting (feature  
Using the automatic document feeder:  
#469 on page 90).  
Original document  
Reduced copy  
Proof set feature  
To make 1 set of a collated copy first, press MCN or MDN  
repeatedly to display “PROOF SET” (step 4 on  
“5.2.2 Collate copy”, page 44). The unit will make 1 set  
of a collated copy and stop temporarily so you can check  
whether the copy was made as you expected. If the copy  
is correct, press MStartN to continue copying.  
If the copy is not correct, press MStopN and start again  
from the beginning.  
5.2.2 Collate copy  
The unit can collate multiple copies in the same order as  
the original document pages.  
5.2.3 Quick ID copy feature / Image repeat  
feature (Scanner glass only)  
1 If the MCopyN light is OFF, turn it ON by pressing  
MCopyN.  
Quick ID copy feature: To copy 2-sided documents  
onto one page.  
Image repeat feature: To copy a single document  
repeatedly onto one page.  
2 Set the original (page 25).  
3 Press MFN to display “COLLATE”.  
4 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display “ON”.  
Note:  
R The copied documents will not be reduced to fit the  
recording paper, and useful for copying small sized  
documents such as business cards.  
5
MSetN  
6 Enter the number of copies (up to 99).  
7 When using the scanner glass:  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
1. MStartN  
R To make a landscape copy, set the original in  
landscape direction. To make a portrait copy, set  
the original in portrait direction.  
R The unit will scan 1 page.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
5. Copier  
R The scanning area changes according to the  
selected setting in step 4. See the following table  
for details. The shaded area will be scanned.  
Original document  
Page layout  
“4 in 1”  
“LANDSCAPE”  
“PORTRAIT”  
“LANDSCAPE”  
2 Press MPage LayoutN repeatedly to select “PAGE  
LAYOUT”.  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “QUIK ID  
COPY” or “IMAGE REPEAT”. A MSetN  
4 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the number of  
original documents from “2 in 1”, “4 in 1” or “8  
in 1”. A MSetN  
R For quick ID copy feature, go to the next step.  
R For image repeat feature, go to step 6.  
“8 in 1”  
5 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the page layout  
from “LANDSCAPE” or “PORTRAIT”. A MSetN  
6 If necessary, enter the number of copies (up to 99).  
7 Quick ID copy feature:  
1. MStartN  
R The unit will scan 1 page.  
2. Place the next document on the scanner glass  
and press MSetN. Repeat this until all the  
documents are scanned.  
“PORTRAIT”  
R The unit will start copying.  
R You can press MStartN anytime to start  
copying.  
Image repeat feature:  
For image repeat feature  
MStartN  
8 After you finish copying, press MStopN to reset this  
Original document  
Page layout  
feature.  
“2 in 1”  
Note:  
R You can save the previous page layout setting  
(feature #467 on page 90).  
For quick ID copy feature  
Original document  
Page layout  
“2 in 1”  
“LANDSCAPE”  
“4 in 1”  
“PORTRAIT”  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. Copier  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
Original document  
Page layout  
R To make a portrait copy, set the original in portrait  
direction. To make a landscape copy, set the  
original in landscape direction.  
“8 in 1”  
2 Press MPage LayoutN repeatedly to select “PAGE  
LAYOUT”.  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “N in 1”.  
A MSetN  
4 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the number of  
original documents from “2 in 1”, “4 in 1” or “8  
in 1”. A MSetN  
5 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the layout from  
“PORTRAIT” or “LANDSCAPE”. A MSetN  
5.2.4 Poster feature (Scanner glass only)  
6 If necessary, enter the number of copies (up to 99).  
You can make copies divided into 2 (“1 X 2”), 4 (“2 X  
2”) or 9 (“3 X 3”) sections to make enlarged copies of  
the individual sections. You can then glue them together  
to make a poster.  
7 When using the scanner glass:  
1. MStartN  
R The unit will scan 1 page.  
2. Place the next document on the scanner glass  
and press MSetN. Repeat this until all the  
documents are scanned.  
R The unit will start copying.  
R You can press MStartN anytime to start  
copying.  
When using the automatic document feeder:  
MStartN  
8 After you finish copying, press MStopN to reset this  
feature.  
Original document  
Page layout  
“2 in 1”  
“PORTRAIT”  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
2 Press MPage LayoutN repeatedly to select “PAGE  
“LANDSCAPE”  
LAYOUT”.  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “POSTER”.  
A MSetN  
4 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “1 X 2”, “2 X  
2” or “3 X 3”. A MSetN  
“4 in 1”  
“PORTRAIT”  
5 If necessary, enter the number of copies (up to 99).  
A MStartN  
6 After you finish copying, press MStopN to reset this  
feature.  
“LANDSCAPE”  
Note:  
R You can save the previous page layout setting  
(feature #467 on page 90).  
5.2.5 N in 1 feature  
You can save paper by copying 2, 4 or 8 pages onto 1  
page. The documents will be reduced to fit the recording  
paper.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5. Copier  
5 Enter the desired edge width of long edge using the  
Original document  
Page layout  
dial keypad. A MSetN  
“8 in 1”  
“PORTRAIT”  
6 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “SHORT  
EDGE”. A MSetN  
7 Enter the desired edge width of short edge using the  
dial keypad. A MSetN  
8 If necessary, enter the number of documents (up to  
“LANDSCAPE”  
99). A MStartN  
9 After you finish copying, press MStopN to reset this  
feature.  
Note:  
R You can hold the previous edge setting (feature #473  
on page 90).  
Note:  
5.2.7 Margin feature  
R You can save the previous page layout setting  
(feature #467 on page 90).  
You can set the unit not to copy a particular edge of the  
document to make a margin. This is useful for binding  
the copied documents.  
Separate N in 1 feature (Scanner glass only)  
You can separate an N in 1 copied document back into  
its original, separate pages. This feature is available for  
documents created using the “2 in 1” and “4 in 1”  
settings.  
Note:  
R To automatically reduce the copies according to the  
set margin, see feature #474 on page 90.  
R This feature and page layout features cannot be used  
1. Set the original (page 25).  
at the same time.  
2. Press MPage LayoutN repeatedly to select “PAGE  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
LAYOUT”.  
R To make a portrait copy, set the original in portrait  
direction. To make a landscape copy, set the  
original in landscape direction.  
3. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “SEPARATE N  
in 1”. A MSetN  
4. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the number of  
original documents from “2 in 1” or “4 in 1”.  
A MSetN  
2 Press MPage LayoutN repeatedly to select  
“MARGIN”.  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “ON”. A  
5. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the page layout  
of the original document from “PORTRAIT” or  
“LANDSCAPE”. A MSetN  
MSetN  
4 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the page layout  
6. If necessary, enter the number of documents (up to  
from “PORTRAIT” or “LANDSCAPE”. A MSetN  
99). A MStartN  
5 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the edge you  
want to set the margin for from “TOP”, “RIGHT”,  
“LEFT” or “BOTTOM”. A MSetN  
7. After you finish copying, press MStopN to reset this  
feature.  
6 Enter the desired margin width using the dial keypad.  
5.2.6 Edge feature  
A MSetN  
You can set the unit not to copy the outer edges of the  
document without reducing the copied documents to fit  
the recording paper. This is useful for copying  
documents with dirty edges.  
7 If necessary, enter the number of documents (up to  
99). A MStartN  
8 After you finish copying, press MStopN to reset this  
feature.  
Note:  
Note:  
R This feature and page layout features cannot be used  
R You can hold the previous margin setting (feature  
at the same time (except for N in 1).  
#475 on page 90).  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
2 Press MPage LayoutN repeatedly to select “EDGE”.  
5.2.8 Copy reservation  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “ON”. A  
You can make a copy reservation under the following  
conditions:  
MSetN  
–
while the unit is printing documents from your  
computer.  
4 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “LONG EDGE”.  
A MSetN  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5. Copier  
–
while the unit is printing received fax documents.  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
2 While “PC PRINTING” or “PRINTING” is displayed,  
press MCopyN.  
3 Make necessary settings such as number of copies,  
resolution, zoom features and page layout features.  
A MStartN  
R “COPY RESERVED” will be displayed. The unit  
will start copying after the current printing job.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Telephone  
1 Lift the cordless handset and dial the telephone  
6.1 Making phone calls  
number.  
R To correct a digit, press MCLEARN (soft key A).  
6. . Telephone  
6.1.1 With the base unit  
2
M
N or MCALLN (soft key A)  
R To make hands-free telephone calls, press M N.  
3 To hang up, press MOFFN or place the cordless  
handset on the charger.  
Note:  
R While talking using M N, you can switch to a  
hands-free telephone conversation by pressing M N.  
To switch back, press M N.  
R For best performance, use the speakerphone in a  
quiet environment.  
To mute your conversation  
While mute is turned ON, you can hear the other party,  
but the other party cannot hear you.  
1. Press MMUTEN (soft key A) during conversation.  
MRedialN  
MIntercomN  
MMonitorN  
R
MMUTEN (soft key A) flashes.  
2. To return to the conversation, press MMUTEN (soft  
1 Lift the handset.  
key A) again.  
2 Dial the telephone number.  
Note:  
3 To hang up, replace the handset.  
R
MMUTEN (soft key A) is a soft key visible on the  
cordless handset display during a call.  
To put a call on hold  
To put a call on hold  
1. Press MIntercomN 2 times during an outside call and  
1. Press MMENUN (soft key A) during an outside call.  
2. “Hold” A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
then replace the handset.  
2. To release hold, press MMonitorN or lift the handset.  
R You can also take the call at the cordless handset  
by pressing M N or M N (KX-MB2060 optional).  
3. To release hold, press M N.  
R Another cordless handset user can take the call  
by pressing M N.  
Note:  
R You can also take the call at the base unit by  
R If a call is kept on hold for more than 9 minutes, an  
alarm tone starts to sound. After 1 additional minute  
on hold, the call is disconnected.  
pressing MMonitorN or lifting the handset.  
Note:  
R If another telephone is connected to the same line,  
R If a call is kept on hold for more than 9 minutes, an  
alarm tone starts to sound and the ringer indicator on  
the cordless handset flashes rapidly. After 1  
you can also take the call by lifting its handset.  
To redial the last number dialed from the base unit  
additional minute on hold, the call is disconnected.  
MMonitorN A MRedialN  
R If another telephone is connected to the same line,  
you can also take the call by lifting its handset.  
6.1.2 With the cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
To redial using the redial list (Memory redial)  
The last 5 telephone numbers dialed from the cordless  
handset are stored in the redial list (each 48 digits max.).  
1. MREDIALN (soft key A) or MEREDIALN  
R If there is a new message in the voice mail or  
answering machine, MREDIALN (soft key A) is  
not displayed.  
A
MCN  
2. Press MCN or MDN to select the desired number.  
MOFFN  
MCNMDNMEREDIALN  
3. M N or M  
N
MsN  
To erase numbers in the redial list  
1. MREDIALN (soft key A) or MEREDIALN  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the desired  
number. A MERASEN (soft key A)  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
6. Telephone  
3. “Yes” A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
To turn the ringer OFF temporarily  
4. MOFFN  
While the cordless handset is ringing for a call, you can  
turn the ringer OFF temporarily by pressing M N (soft  
key A).  
Pause (for PBX/long distance service users)  
A pause is sometimes required when making calls using  
a PBX or long distance service. When storing a calling  
card access number and/or PIN in the phonebook, a  
pause is also needed (page 53).  
Example: If you need to dial the line access number  
“9” when making outside calls with a PBX:  
6.3 Silent mode  
Silent mode allows you to select a period of time during  
which the base unit, and the cordless handset  
(KX-MB2060 optional) will not ring for outside calls. This  
feature is useful for time periods when you do not want  
to be disturbed, for example, while sleeping. Silent mode  
can be set for the base unit and each cordless handset.  
R The default setting is “OFF”/“Off”.  
1. M9N A MPAUSEN (soft key A)  
2. Dial the telephone number. A M  
N
Note:  
R A 3.5 second pause is inserted each time MPAUSEN  
(soft key A) is pressed. Repeat as needed to create  
longer pauses.  
R The default start time is “11:00PM”/“11:00 PM”  
and the default end time is “06:00AM”/“06:00  
AM”.  
Important:  
6.2 Answering phone calls  
R Set the date and time beforehand (feature #101 on  
page 28).  
6.2.1 With the base unit  
R If you have set the alarm, the alarm sounds even  
if the silent mode is turned on (cordless handset,  
KX-MB2060 optional).  
1 Lift the handset.  
2 To hang up, replace the handset.  
Note:  
R Silent mode can be changed individually for the base  
unit, and the cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional).  
6.2.2 With the cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
When a call is being received, the ringer indicator on the  
cordless handset flashes rapidly.  
6.3.1 With the base unit  
To turn the silent mode ON/OFF  
1. MMenuN A MBNM2NM3NM8N  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “ON” or “OFF”.  
3. MSetN A MMenuN  
A
MCN  
Note:  
MOFFN  
R When the silent mode is set, “[S]” is displayed.  
MsN  
To change the start and end time  
1. MMenuN A MBNM2NM3NM7N A MSetN  
2. Enter the desired hour and minute you wish to start  
this feature. A MSetN  
1 Lift the cordless handset and press M N or M  
N
R Press MHN repeatedly to select “AM” or “PM”.  
when the cordless handset rings.  
R If you select Spanish for the language (feature  
#110 on page 78), the time is set using a 24  
hour clock.  
R You can also answer the call by pressing any dial  
key from M0N to M9N, MGN or MBN (Any key talk  
feature).  
3. Enter the desired hour and minute you wish to end  
this feature. A MSetN  
2 To hang up, press MOFFN or place the cordless  
handset on the charger.  
R Press MHN repeatedly to select “AM” or “PM”.  
R If you select Spanish for the language (feature  
#110 on page 78), the time is set using a 24  
hour clock.  
Auto talk feature (Cordless handset)  
You can answer calls simply by lifting the cordless  
handset off the charger. You do not need to press M N.  
To turn this feature ON, see feature #200 on page 102.  
4. MMenuN  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
6. Telephone  
R Caller ID subscribers can use group ringer tone  
features (cordless handset, KX-MB2060 optional)  
(page 54).  
6.3.2 With the cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
To turn the silent mode ON/OFF  
Station keys MPhonebookN MSetN  
MStopN  
1. MMENUN (soft key) A M#NM2NM3NM8N  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “On” or “Off”.  
A MSAVEN (soft key)  
R If you select “Off”, press MOFFN to exit.  
3. Enter the desired hour and minute you wish to start  
this feature.  
R Press MAM/PMN (soft key) repeatedly to select  
“AM” or “PM”. A MOKN (soft key)  
MLowerN MFaxN  
MMenuN MCNMDNMEN  
MMonitorN  
R If you select Spanish for the language (feature  
#110 on page 103), the time is set using a 24  
hour clock.  
4. Enter the desired hour and minute you wish to end  
this feature.  
A
R Press MAM/PMN (soft key) repeatedly to select  
“AM” or “PM”.  
MCN  
MCNMDN  
MsN  
MOFFN  
R If you select Spanish for the language (feature  
#110 on page 103), the time is set using a 24  
hour clock.  
5. MSAVEN (soft key) A MOFFN  
R When the silent mode is set,  
is displayed.  
Note:  
6.4.1 Storing one-touch dial item (Base unit  
only)  
R To correct a digit, press MFN or MEN to move the cursor  
to the digit, then make the correction.  
1 Press MMenuN repeatedly to display “PHONEBOOK  
To change the start and end time  
SET”.  
1. MMENUN (soft key) A M#NM2NM3NM7N  
2 Select the desired station key.  
2. Continue from step 3, “To turn the silent mode ON/  
For station 1-2:  
OFF”, page 51.  
1. Press one of the station keys.  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “DIAL  
MODE”. A MSetN  
6.4 One-touch dial feature and  
shared phonebook  
For station 3:  
Press the station key.  
The base unit provides the one-touch dial feature (6  
items).  
For station 4-6:  
The shared phonebook allows you to make calls without  
having to dial manually. The base unit and any cordless  
handset registered to the base unit can use the shared  
phonebook. You can store 100 items to the shared  
phonebook.  
R One-touch dial items are only displayed in the base  
unit’s phonebook.  
R Station 1 and 2 can be used alternatively as  
Press MLowerN, then press one of the station keys.  
3 Enter the name, up to 16 characters (see page 106  
for character entry). A MSetN  
4 Enter the telephone number, up to 24 digits. A  
MSetN  
R To program other items, repeat steps 2 to 4.  
5
MStopN  
broadcast keys (page 59).  
R Make sure that the MFaxN light is ON.  
Note:  
R A space entered in a telephone number counts as 2  
Important:  
digits.  
R Only 1 person can access the shared phonebook  
at a time.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
6. Telephone  
–
–
Items stored with broadcast keys (page 59).  
Items stored with delayed send feature  
(feature #412 on page 84).  
6.4.2 Storing phonebook items  
With the base unit  
Erase from these features beforehand.  
1. Press MMenuN repeatedly to display “PHONEBOOK  
SET”. A MEN  
With the base unit  
2. Enter the name, up to 16 characters (see page 106  
1. MPhonebookN  
for character entry). AMSetN  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
3. Enter the telephone number, up to 24 digits. A  
MSetN  
item. A MMenuN A MGN  
3. Edit the name if necessary. A MSetN  
R To program other items, repeat steps 2 to 3.  
4. Edit the telephone number if necessary. A MSetN  
4. MMenuN  
A MStopN  
Note:  
Note:  
R A space entered in a telephone number counts as 2  
R Phonebook items stored with the base unit are  
displayed in “Group 1” of the cordless handset’s  
phonebook (KX-MB2060 optional).  
digits.  
R Phonebook items stored with the base unit are  
displayed in “Group 1” of the cordless handset’s  
phonebook (KX-MB2060 optional).  
With the cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional)  
1. M N (soft key A)  
With the cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional)  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
1. M N (soft key A) A MADDN (soft key A)  
item. A MEDITN (soft key A)  
2. Enter the name, up to 16 characters (see page 106  
3. Edit the name if necessary. A MOKN (soft key A)  
for character entry). A MOKN (soft key A)  
4. Edit the telephone number if necessary. A MOKN  
3. Enter the telephone number, up to 24 digits. A  
(soft key A)  
MOKN (soft key A)  
5. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
4. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
group. A MSELECTN (soft key A) 2 times.  
R To program other items, repeat from step 2.  
group. A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
6. MSELECTN (soft key A) A MOFFN  
5. MOFFN  
6.4.5 Erasing a stored item  
6.4.3 Groups (Cordless handset only,  
KX-MB2060 optional)  
Important:  
R Following phonebook items cannot be erased.  
–
–
Items stored with broadcast keys (page 59).  
Items stored with delayed send feature  
(feature #412 on page 84).  
Groups can help you find items in the phonebook quickly  
and easily. When adding an item to the phonebook, you  
can assign it to one of 9 groups. You can change the  
names of groups assigned for phonebook items  
(“Friends”, “Family”, etc.) and then search for phonebook  
items by group.  
Erase from these features beforehand.  
With the base unit  
1. MPhonebookN  
To change the group names  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
item. A MMenuN A MBN  
1. M N (soft key A) A MMENUN (soft key A)  
2. “Group” A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
R To cancel erasing, press MStopN.  
3. MSetN A MStopN  
3. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
group. A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
With the cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional)  
To erase a specific item  
4. “Group name” A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
5. Edit the name, 10 characters (see page 106 for  
1. M N (soft key A)  
character entry). A MSAVEN (soft key A)  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
6. MOFFN  
item.  
Note:  
3. MERASEN (soft key A)  
R The group ringer tone feature is available for Caller  
4. “Yes” A MSELECTN (soft key A) A MOFFN  
To erase all items  
ID subscribers (page 54).  
1. M N (soft key A) A MMENUN (soft key A)  
2. “Erase all” A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
6.4.4 Editing a stored item  
Important:  
3. “Yes” A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
R Following phonebook items cannot be edited.  
4. “Yes” A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
6. Telephone  
5. MOFFN  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
group. A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
R If you select “All groups”, the cordless  
handset ends the group search.  
6.4.6 Making a phone call using one-touch  
dial feature (Base unit only)  
3. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
item.  
1 Press MMonitorN or lift the handset.  
R To dial the displayed party, press M N or M N.  
2 Select the desired station key.  
For station 1-3:  
Press the desired station key.  
6.5 Chain dial (Cordless handset  
only, KX-MB2060 optional)  
For station 4-6:  
Press MLowerN, then press the desired station key.  
This feature allows you to dial telephone numbers in the  
phonebook while you are on a call. This feature can be  
used, for example, to dial a calling card access number  
or bank account PIN that you have stored in the  
phonebook, without having to dial manually.  
R The unit will start dialing automatically.  
6.4.7 Making a phone call using the  
phonebook  
1 During an outside call, press MMENUN (soft key).  
With the base unit  
1. Press MPhonebookN.  
2 “Phonebook” A MSELECTN (soft key)  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the desired  
item.  
item.  
3. Press MMonitorN or lift the handset.  
R To search by first character (index search) or  
group, see page 53.  
R The unit will start dialing automatically.  
With the cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional)  
4 Press MCALLN (soft key) to dial the number.  
1. M N (soft key A)  
Note:  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
item.  
R When storing a calling card access number and your  
PIN in the phonebook as one phonebook item, press  
MPAUSEN (soft key) to add pauses after the number  
and PIN as necessary (page 50).  
R You can scroll through the phonebook item by  
pressing and holding MCN or MDN.  
3. M  
N
R If you have rotary/pulse service, you need to press  
MGN (Tone) before pressing MMENUN (soft key) in  
step 1 to change the dialing mode temporarily to tone.  
When adding items to the phonebook, we  
To search for a name by initial  
Example: “LISA”  
recommend adding MGN (Tone) to the beginning of  
telephone numbers you wish to chain dial (page 52).  
With the base unit  
1. MPhonebookN  
2. Press MCN or MDN to initiate the phonebook.  
3. Press M5N repeatedly to display any name with the  
initial “L” (see page 106 for character entry).  
R To search for symbols, press M1N.  
4. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display “LISA”.  
R To stop the search, press MStopN.  
R To dial the displayed party, press MMonitorN or lift  
the handset.  
With the cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional)  
1. M N (soft key A)  
2. Press MCN or MDN to initiate the phonebook.  
3. Press M5N repeatedly to display any name with the  
initial “L” (see page 106 for character entry).  
R To search for symbols, press M1N.  
4. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display “LISA”.  
R To dial the displayed party, press M N or M N.  
To search for a name by group (Cordless handset  
only, KX-MB2060 optional)  
1. M N (soft key A) A MGROUPN (soft key A)  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
7. Caller ID  
This feature allows you to receive calls while you are  
already talking on the telephone. If you receive a call  
while on the telephone, you will hear a call waiting tone.  
If you subscribe to both Caller ID and Call Waiting  
with Caller ID services, the 2nd caller’s information is  
displayed on the base unit, or cordless handset  
(KX-MB2060 optional) that is in use after you hear the  
call waiting tone.  
7.1 Caller ID  
This unit is compatible with the Caller ID service  
offered by your local telephone company. To use this  
unit’s Caller ID features, you must subscribe to a  
Caller ID service.  
Make sure the following ring count is set to 2 or more  
rings beforehand.  
7. . Caller ID  
1. Press MFlashN on the base unit, or MCALL WAITN on  
the cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional) to  
answer the 2nd call.  
–
–
FAX ring count (feature #210 on page 80)  
TAM/FAX ring count (feature #211 on page 76,  
80)  
2. To switch between calls, press MFlashN on the base  
unit, or MCALL WAITN on the cordless handset  
(KX-MB2060 optional).  
R The name display service may not be available in  
some areas. For further information, please contact  
your telephone company.  
Note:  
R Please contact your service provider/telephone  
company for details and availability of this service in  
your area.  
7.1.1 How Caller ID is displayed  
The calling party’s name or telephone number will be  
displayed. You have the option of whether or not to  
answer the call.  
The unit will automatically store caller information (name,  
telephone number and date and time of the call) from the  
50 most recent calls. It is possible to view caller  
information on the display (page 55) or print the entire  
Caller ID list (page 137).  
R When caller information is received and it matches a  
telephone number stored in the unit’s one-touch dial  
or phonebook, the stored name will be displayed.  
R If the unit is connected to a PBX (Private Branch  
Exchange) system, caller information may not be  
received properly. Consult your PBX supplier.  
7.1.2 Group ringer tone for phonebook  
(Cordless handset only, KX-MB2060  
optional)  
This feature can help you identify who is calling by using  
different ringer tones for different groups of callers. When  
adding an item to the phonebook, you can assign it to the  
desired group (page 52). When a call is received from a  
caller assigned to a group, the ringer you selected for that  
group rings after caller information is displayed. If you  
select “Current ringer” (default), the cordless  
handset uses the ringer tone you selected with feature  
#161 (page 101) when calls from this group are  
received.  
R If the unit cannot receive caller information, the  
following is displayed:  
“OUT OF AREA”/“Out of area”: The caller dials  
from an area which does not provide a Caller ID  
service.  
1
M
N (soft key) A MMENUN (soft key)  
2 “Group” A MSELECTN (soft key)  
“PRIVATE CALLER”/“Private caller”: The  
caller requests not to send caller information.  
“LONG DISTANCE”/“Long distance”: The caller  
made a long distance call.  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
group. A MSELECTN (soft key)  
4 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the current  
setting of the group ringer tone. A MSELECTN (soft  
key)  
Missed calls  
5 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
If a call is not answered, the unit treats the call as a  
missed call. The number of missed calls are shown on  
the display (the cordless handset, KX-MB2060 optional,  
also shows “Missed call”). This lets you know if you  
should view the caller list to see who called while you  
were away.  
ringer tone. A MSAVEN (soft key)  
6
MOFFN  
To confirm caller information by printing the Caller  
ID list (Base unit only)  
–
–
To print manually, see page 137.  
To print automatically after every 50 new calls,  
activate feature #216 (page 80).  
For call waiting or Call Waiting Caller ID service  
users  
To use call waiting, you must first subscribe to call waiting  
from your service provider/telephone company.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
7. Caller ID  
To edit a telephone number before calling back/  
storing  
7.2 Viewing and calling back  
using caller information  
You can edit a telephone number in the caller list by  
removing its area code and/or the long distance code  
“1”.  
While displaying a desired caller information, press  
MEDITN (soft key) repeatedly. Each time you press  
MEDITN (soft key), the telephone number will be changed  
as follows:  
Important:  
R Only 1 person can access the caller list at a time.  
R Make sure the unit’s date and time setting is  
correct (page 28).  
7.2.1 With the base unit  
Local telephone number only (area code omitted)  
*1  
R Make sure that the MFaxN light is ON.  
Area code – Local telephone number  
1
MCaller IDN  
1 – Area code – Local telephone number (“1”  
2 Press MCN to search from the recently received caller  
*1  
added)  
information.  
*1 If the received caller information does not include an  
area code, this pattern is not available.  
R If you press MDN, the display order will be  
reversed.  
R To send a fax, see page 57.  
R To store the number in phonebook, follow from step  
3 of the storing procedure on page 56.  
3 Press MMonitorN or lift the handset to return the call.  
7.2.3 Symbols and operations for caller  
information  
To change the way caller information is displayed  
Press MCaller IDN repeatedly after step 2 to change  
name/telephone number information.  
What “ ” means  
To edit a telephone number before calling back/  
storing  
If the item has already been viewed or answered, “ ” is  
displayed, even if it was viewed or answered using  
another unit.  
While displaying a desired caller information, press  
MGN repeatedly. Each time you press MGN, the telephone  
number will be changed as follows:  
To stop viewing  
Press MOFFN on the cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional) or MStopN on the base unit.  
1 – Area code – Local telephone number (“1”  
*1  
added)  
Local telephone number only (area code omitted)  
7.3 Erasing caller information  
*1  
Area code – Local telephone number  
7.3.1 With the base unit  
*1 If the received caller information does not include an  
area code, this pattern is not available.  
Erasing all caller information  
R To store the number in one-touch dial or phonebook,  
follow from step 3 of the storing procedure on  
page 56.  
1. Press MMenuN repeatedly to display “CALLER  
SETUP”. A MSetN  
R “CALL LIST ERASE” will be displayed.  
2. MSetN  
7.2.2 With the cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
R To cancel erasing, press MStopN, then MMenuN.  
3. MSetN A MStopN  
1
MCIDFN  
Erasing specific caller information  
R Make sure that the MFaxN light is ON.  
1. MCaller IDN  
2 Press MCN to search from the recently received caller  
information.  
R If you press MDN, the display order will be  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
reversed.  
item. A MEraseN A MSetN A MStopN  
R If is displayed, not all of the information is  
shown. To see the remaining information, press  
MEN. To return to the previous screen, press MFN.  
7.3.2 With the cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
3 Press M N or M N to return the call.  
1
MCIDFN  
R To erase all items, skip to step 3.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
7. Caller ID  
2 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
4 “Phonebook” A MSELECTN (soft key) A MOKN  
item.  
(soft key) A MOKN (soft key)  
3
MERASEN (soft key)  
5 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
group. A MSELECTN (soft key)  
4 “Yes” A MSELECTN (soft key) A MOFFN  
6
MSELECTN (soft key) A MOFFN  
Note:  
7.4 Storing caller information  
R To edit a name or number, see page 52.  
7.4.1 Into the one-touch dial feature and  
phonebook (Base unit)  
R Make sure that the MFaxN light is ON.  
1
MCaller IDN  
2 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
item.  
3
MMenuN  
4 Select the station key or phonebook.  
For station 1-2:  
1. Press the desired station key.  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “DIAL  
MODE”. A MSetN A MSetN  
For station 3:  
Press the station key. A MSetN  
For station 4-6:  
Press MLowerN, then press the desired station key.  
A MSetN  
For phonebook:  
Press MFN or MEN. A MSetN  
5
MSetN  
Note:  
R To edit a name or number, see page 52.  
R If you assign an item to a station key which already  
contains an item, the previous item will be replaced.  
R Station 1 and 2 can be used alternatively as  
broadcast keys (page 59).  
R One-touch dial items are only displayed in the base  
unit’s phonebook.  
R Phonebook items stored with the base unit are  
displayed in “Group 1” of the cordless handset’s  
phonebook (KX-MB2060 optional).  
7.4.2 Into the phonebook (Cordless handset,  
KX-MB2060 optional)  
1
MCIDFN  
2 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
item.  
R To edit the number, press MEDITN (soft key)  
repeatedly until the telephone number is shown  
in the desired format.  
3
MSAVEN (soft key)  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
8. Fax  
To select the resolution  
8.1 Sending a fax manually  
1. Press MResolutionN repeatedly.  
–
–
–
–
“STANDARD”: For normal-sized characters.  
8
.
.
F
a
x
8.1.1 Using the scanner glass  
“FINE”: For small-sized characters.  
“SUPER FINE”: For very small-sized characters.  
By using the scanner glass, you can send a page from  
booklets or small size paper.  
“PHOTO”: For photographs, shaded drawings,  
etc.  
2. MSetN  
R Using the “FINE”, “SUPER FINE” and “PHOTO”  
settings will increase transmission time.  
To select the contrast  
Adjust this setting depending on the darkness or  
lightness of the document. 5 levels (low to high) are  
available.  
Press MContrastN repeatedly. A MSetN  
Note:  
R You can save the previous contrast setting (feature  
#462 on page 81).  
To redial the last number  
MRedialN  
R If the line is busy, the unit will automatically redial the  
MFaxN  
number 1 time.  
MSetN MStartN  
MRedialN  
Note:  
MContrastN  
R To stop sending, see page 108.  
MResolutionN  
Reserving the fax transmission (Dual Access)  
You can reserve a fax transmission even when the unit  
is just receiving a fax or sending a fax from memory.  
1 If the MFaxN light is OFF, turn it ON by pressing  
MFaxN.  
–
–
Up to 3 reservations when sending  
Up to 4 reservations when receiving  
2 Set the original (page 25).  
1. Set the original during fax reception or fax memory  
3 If necessary, change the resolution and contrast  
according to the type of document.  
transmission.  
2. Enter the fax number using the dial keypad,  
R To select the resolution, see page 57.  
R To select the contrast, see page 57.  
one-touch dial or phonebook.  
3. When using the scanner glass, press MStartN. The  
unit will scan 1 page. Place the next document on the  
scanner glass and press MSetN. Repeat this until all  
the documents are scanned, then press MStartN.  
When using the automatic document feeder,  
press MStartN.  
4 Dial the fax number.  
5 Press MStartN to scan the document into memory.  
Wait until “SCAN:PRESS SET” “SEND:PRESS  
START” is displayed.  
R To send a single page, go to step 7.  
R If the document exceeds the memory capacity, the  
reservation for that document will be canceled. You  
must send the entire document manually.  
R To send multiple pages, go to the next step.  
6 Place the next page on the scanner glass. A MSetN  
R To send more pages, repeat this step.  
Printing a confirmation report  
7
MStartN  
A confirmation report provides you with a printed record  
of transmission results. To print the confirmation reports,  
make sure that feature #401 is activated (page 83). For  
an explanation of the messages, see page 109.  
Note:  
R To stop sending, see page 108.  
R You can change the default operation mode (feature  
#463 on page 81) and the timer before returning to  
the default operation mode (feature #464 on  
page 81).  
Printing a journal report  
A journal report provides you with a printed record of the  
30 most recent faxes. To print it manually, see  
page 137. To print it automatically after every 30 new  
fax transmissions and receptions, make sure feature  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
8. Fax  
#402 is activated (page 83). For an explanation of the  
messages, see page 109.  
8.2 Sending a fax using one-touch  
dial feature and phonebook  
Before using this feature, store the desired names and  
telephone numbers into the one-touch dial feature and  
phonebook (page 51).  
8.1.2 Using the automatic document feeder  
MFaxN  
R Make sure that the MFaxN light is ON.  
8.2.1 Using the scanner glass  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
2 If necessary, change the resolution (page 57) and the  
contrast (page 57).  
3 Enter the fax number.  
Using station 1-3:  
Press the desired station key.  
Using station 4-6:  
Press MLowerN, then press the desired station key.  
MMonitorN  
MStartN  
Using phonebook:  
MQuick ScanN  
Press MPhonebookN, then press MCN or MDN  
repeatedly to display the desired item.  
1 If the MFaxN light is OFF, turn it ON by pressing  
4 Press MStartN to scan the document into memory.  
Wait until “SCAN:PRESS SET” “SEND:PRESS  
START” is displayed.  
MFaxN.  
2 Set the original (page 25).  
R To send a single page, go to step 6.  
R To send multiple pages, go to the next step.  
3 If necessary, change the resolution and contrast  
according to the type of document.  
R To select the resolution, see page 57.  
R To select the contrast, see page 57.  
5 Place the next page. A MSetN  
R To send more pages, repeat this step.  
4
MMonitorN  
6
MStartN  
5 Dial the fax number.  
To search for a name by initial  
Example: “LISA”  
6 When a fax tone is heard:  
Press MStartN.  
1. MPhonebookN  
When the other party answers your call:  
2. Press MCN or MDN to initiate the phonebook.  
Lift the handset and ask them to press their start  
button. When the fax tone is heard, press MStartN.  
3. Press M5N repeatedly to display any name with the  
initial “L” (see page 106 for character entry).  
R To search for symbols, press M1N.  
4. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display “LISA”.  
R To stop the search, press MStopN.  
Note:  
R After pressing MStartN, you can replace the handset.  
R To stop sending, see page 108.  
R Do not open the document cover when sending a fax  
Fax auto redial  
with the automatic document feeder.  
If the line is busy or if there is no answer, the unit will  
automatically redial the number 1 time.  
Pre-dialing a fax number  
1. Enter the fax number.  
Note:  
2. Set the original (page 25). A MStartN  
R To stop sending, see page 108.  
Sending from memory (Quick scan feature)  
1. Set the original (page 25).  
8.2.2 Using the automatic document feeder  
1 Set the original (page 25).  
2. Enter the fax number. A MQuick ScanN  
2 If necessary, change the resolution (page 57) and the  
contrast (page 57).  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
8. Fax  
3 Enter the fax number using one-touch dial or  
8.3 Broadcast transmission  
phonebook.  
You can send the same document to multiple parties (up  
to 20). To use this feature, store the fax numbers into  
broadcast memory as follows.  
4
MStartN  
Broadcast: Store items using one-touch dial or  
phonebook (page 51).  
Manual broadcast: Store items using one-touch dial or  
phonebook (page 51). You can also use the dial keypad  
to store items manually.  
Your programmed items will remain in the broadcast  
memory, allowing frequent re-use.  
R The broadcast function utilizes station 1-2. The  
one-touch dial function will be canceled.  
R Make sure that the MFaxN light is ON.  
8.3.1 Programming items into the broadcast  
memory  
1 Press MMenuN repeatedly to display “PHONEBOOK  
SET”.  
2 Select the desired broadcast key.  
For BROADCAST:  
1. MBroadcastN  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select  
“BROADCAST”.  
For MANUAL BROADCAST:  
1. MManual BroadN  
2. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “MANUAL  
BROAD”.  
3
MSetN  
4 Program items.  
Using station 1-3:  
Press the desired station key.  
Using station 4-6:  
Press MLowerN, then press the desired station key.  
Using phonebook:  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
item. A MSetN  
Using the dial keypad (only for manual broad):  
Enter the fax number. A MSetN  
R The number in brackets indicates the number of  
registered items.  
R To program other items, repeat this step (up to 20  
items).  
R If you have programmed the wrong item, press  
MStopN to erase the item.  
5
6
MSetN  
R To program another broadcast key, repeat steps  
2 to 5.  
MStopN  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
8. Fax  
To send the same document using the automatic  
document feeder  
8.3.2 Adding a new item into the broadcast  
memory  
1. Set the original (page 25).  
1
MPhonebookN  
2. If necessary, change the resolution (page 57) and the  
contrast (page 57).  
2 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
broadcast memory location (“<BROADCAST>” or  
“<MANUAL BROAD>”). A MMenuN A MGN  
3. Press MBroadcastN or MManual BroadN.  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the item you  
want to add. A MSetN  
R To add other items, repeat this step (up to 20  
items).  
4
MStopN  
Note:  
R When adding new items to the MANUAL  
BROADCAST memory, you can only select stored  
items.  
8.3.3 Erasing a stored item from the  
broadcast memory  
1
MPhonebookN  
2 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
broadcast memory location (“<BROADCAST>” or  
“<MANUAL BROAD>”). A MMenuN A MBN  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the item you  
want to erase.  
R To cancel erasing, press MStopN.  
4
MSetN A MSetN A MStopN  
8.3.4 Sending the same document to  
pre-programmed parties  
To send the same document using the scanner glass  
1. Set the original (page 25).  
2. If necessary, change the resolution (page 57) and the  
contrast (page 57).  
3. Press MBroadcastN or MManual BroadN.  
R To send a single page, go to step 5.  
R To send multiple pages, go to the next step.  
4. Place the next page. A MSetN  
R To send more pages, repeat this step.  
5. MStartN  
Note:  
R To stop sending, see page 108.  
R If you select “FINE”, “SUPER FINE” or “PHOTO”  
resolution, the number of pages that the unit can  
send will decrease.  
R If the document exceeds the memory capacity,  
sending will be canceled.  
R If a party is busy or does not answer, it will be skipped  
and redialed later 1 time.  
R After transmission, the unit will automatically print a  
report (broadcast sending report).  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8. Fax  
8.4 Sending an electronic  
8.5 Selecting the way to use your  
document as a fax message from unit  
Depending on your situation, select the way you prefer  
to use your unit.  
your computer  
You can access the fax function from a Windows  
application using Multi-Function Station.  
For example, to send a document created from  
WordPad, proceed as follows.  
–
Use as a telephone answering machine and/or fax  
(TAM/FAX mode)  
–
–
Use only as a fax (FAX ONLY mode)  
Use mostly as a telephone (TEL mode)  
1 Open the document you want to send.  
2 Select [Print...] from the [File] menu.  
8.5.1 Use as a telephone answering machine  
and/or fax (TAM/FAX mode)  
R The [Print] dialog box will appear.  
3 Select the PCFAX unit’s name as the active printer.  
Your situation  
4 Click [Print].  
You want to answer phone calls using the telephone  
answering machine and receive faxes automatically.  
R The [Send a Fax] dialog box will appear.  
Setup  
Set the unit to TAM/FAX mode (page 62) by pressing  
MAuto AnswerN repeatedly.  
R The MAuto AnswerN light on the base unit turns ON.  
5 Enter the fax number using the keypad display or the  
base unit’s phonebook.  
Auto Answer  
R To stop the operation, click [Cancel].  
6 [Send]  
R The document will be sent through the unit from  
your computer.  
Note:  
Note:  
R Make sure feature #400 is set to “TAM/FAX”  
R To stop sending, see page 108.  
R If the document exceeds the memory capacity of the  
unit, sending will be canceled.  
R For details, see the help file by selecting [ ] from  
beforehand (page 81).  
R Received fax document and voice message can be  
transferred automatically to desired email address.  
To use the email transfer feature, set the email  
destination beforehand (page 87, 89).  
Multi-Function Station.  
R Click [Select...] to change the active unit.  
R Do not connect an answering machine to the same  
telephone line. If connected, set the automatic  
answer feature to OFF by pressing MAuto AnswerN  
repeatedly.  
R It is not recommended to subscribe to voice mail  
service as it may disturb fax reception. If you do  
subscribe to a voice mail service, set the ring count  
of your voice mail service to 5 rings or greater.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
8. Fax  
How phone calls and faxes are received  
8.6 Receiving a fax automatically:  
Auto answer ON  
If the call is a phone call, the unit will record the caller’s  
message automatically.  
If a fax calling tone is detected, the unit will receive the  
fax automatically.  
R A4 or letter size recording paper can be used.  
8.6.1 Activating TAM/FAX mode (Telephone  
Answering Machine/Fax mode)  
8.5.2 Use only as a fax (FAX ONLY mode)  
Your situation  
1 Make sure feature #400 is set to “TAM/FAX”  
You have a separate telephone line just for faxes, or you  
want to use the unit only for receiving faxes.  
(page 81) beforehand.  
2 Press MAuto AnswerN repeatedly to display “TAM/  
Setup  
FAX MODE”.  
Set the unit to FAX ONLY mode (page 63) by pressing  
MAuto AnswerN repeatedly.  
R The MAuto AnswerN light on the base unit turns ON.  
R You can adjust the speaker volume by pressing  
MCN or MDN while listening to the greeting  
message.  
R The display will show the ring count in TAM/FAX  
mode. If you wish to change it, press MFN or MEN  
repeatedly to display the desired setting, and  
press MSetN.  
Auto Answer  
R The MAuto AnswerN light on the base unit turns  
ON.  
Note:  
R Make sure feature #400 is set to “FAX ONLY”  
MStopN  
beforehand (page 81).  
R Received fax documents can be transferred  
automatically to desired email address. To use the  
email transfer feature, set the email destination  
beforehand (page 87).  
How faxes are received  
All incoming calls will be answered as faxes.  
8.5.3 Use mostly as a telephone (TEL mode)  
Your situation  
Auto Answer  
You want to answer calls by yourself. If a fax call is  
received, you must receive the fax manually.  
Setup  
MSetNMCNMDNMFNMEN  
Set the unit to TEL mode (page 64) by pressing MAuto  
AnswerN repeatedly.  
R The MAuto AnswerN light on the base unit turns OFF.  
Auto Answer  
A
MOFFN  
How to receive phone calls and faxes  
You have to answer all calls manually.  
To receive a fax document, press MStartN and then M2N.  
Note:  
R The maximum incoming message recording time can  
be changed (feature #305 on page 76, 88).  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
8. Fax  
Activate the fax to email address (feature #452 on  
page 86)  
Program the email server settings (page 97) and  
the email destinations (page 98)  
Set the TAM to email destinations (page 89)  
Set the fax to email destinations (page 87)  
Activating TAM/FAX mode with the cordless handset  
(KX-MB2060 optional)  
–
–
1. MMENUN (soft key A)  
2. “Answering device” A MSELECTN (soft key  
A)  
3. “Answer on” A MSELECTN (soft key A) A  
Note:  
MOFFN  
R To check the status of the transfer, see page 87,  
Note:  
89.  
R Make sure feature #400 is set to “TAM/FAX”  
Useful information:  
beforehand (page 81).  
If you are out for a long period of time, we recommend  
the following.  
How phone calls and faxes are received  
When receiving calls, the unit works as an answering  
machine and/or fax.  
1. Set this feature.  
2. Also activate PC FAX (page 65) and/or PC TAM  
(page 72), and keep your computer turned ON.  
R For PC FAX, start Multi-Function station, then  
activate [PC FAX].  
Note:  
R Even when you answer a call with the extension  
telephone, the answering machine may continue  
answering the call depending on the type of an  
extension telephone. Press MStopN on the base unit  
to talk with the calling party.  
In this case, data will be transferred to your computer  
using PC FAX and/or PC TAM feature, then the  
transferred data will be deleted from your unit  
automatically. The same data will also be sent to your  
email address, so you can check your messages daily,  
preventing the unit to run out of paper/memory etc.  
Receiving a voice message and fax document in one  
call  
The caller can leave a voice message and send a fax  
document during the same call. Inform the caller of the  
following procedure beforehand.  
8.6.2 Activating FAX ONLY mode  
1. The caller calls your unit.  
1 Make sure feature #400 is set to “FAX ONLY”  
R The answering machine will answer the call.  
(page 81) beforehand.  
2. The caller can leave a message after the greeting  
2 Press MAuto AnswerN repeatedly to display “FAX  
message.  
ONLY MODE”.  
3. The caller presses MGNM9N.  
R The display will show the ring count in FAX ONLY  
mode. If you wish to change it, press MFN or MEN  
repeatedly to display the desired setting, and  
press MSetN.  
R The unit will activate the fax function.  
4. The caller presses the start button to send a fax.  
Changing the ring count in TAM/FAX mode  
R The MAuto AnswerN light on the base unit turns  
You can select from “2” (default), “3”, “4”, or “TOLL  
SAVER”. This setting can be changed by feature #211 on  
page 80, or using the cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional) (feature #211 on page 76).  
ON.  
–
“TOLL SAVER”: The unit answers after 2 or 3 rings  
when new messages have been recorded, and after  
4 or 5 rings when there are no new messages. If you  
call your unit from a remote location to listen to new  
messages (page 73), you will know that there are  
no new messages when the unit rings for the 4th time.  
You can then hang up without being charged for the  
call.  
Transferring received fax document/voice message  
automatically to email address  
You can transfer the received fax document (fax to email  
feature) and/or voice message (TAM to email feature) to  
desired email address automatically. Transferred  
messages will not be deleted from the unit.  
Auto Answer  
MSetNMFNMEN  
To activate these features, set the following:  
–
Activate the TAM to email address (feature #369 on  
page 88)  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
8. Fax  
Activating FAX ONLY mode with the cordless  
handset (KX-MB2060 optional)  
8.7 Receiving a fax manually:  
Auto answer OFF  
1. MMENUN (soft key)  
2. “Answering device” A MSELECTN (soft key)  
3. “Answer on” A MSELECTN (soft key) A MOFFN  
R A4 or letter size recording paper can be used.  
8.7.1 Activating TEL mode  
Note:  
R Make sure feature #400 is set to “FAX ONLY”  
Press MAuto AnswerN repeatedly to display “TEL  
MODE”.  
beforehand (page 81).  
R The MAuto AnswerN light on the base unit turns OFF.  
How faxes are received  
When receiving calls, the unit will automatically answer  
all calls and only receive fax documents.  
Note:  
R The number of rings before a call is answered in FAX  
ONLY mode can be changed (feature #210 on  
page 80).  
If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring service  
See page 68.  
Transferring received fax document automatically to  
email address  
Auto Answer  
You can transfer the received fax document (fax to email  
feature) to desired email address automatically.  
Transferred messages will not be deleted from the unit.  
To activate this feature, set the following:  
MStartN  
–
–
–
Activate the fax to email address (feature #452 on  
page 86)  
Program the email server settings (page 97) and  
the email destinations (page 98)  
Set the fax to email destinations (page 87)  
A
Note:  
MCN  
R To check the status of the transfer, see page 87.  
MOFFN  
Useful information:  
MsN  
See “Transferring received fax document/voice  
message automatically to email address”, page 63.  
Activating TEL mode with the cordless handset  
(KX-MB2060 optional)  
1. MMENUN (soft key A)  
2. “Answering device” A MSELECTN (soft key  
A)  
3. “Answer off” A MSELECTN (soft key A) A  
MOFFN  
How to receive phone calls and faxes with the  
handset of base unit  
1. Lift the handset to answer the call.  
2. When:  
–
–
–
document reception is required,  
a fax calling tone (slow beep) is heard, or  
no sound is heard,  
press MStartN, and then M2N.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
8. Fax  
8.8.1 Activating the junk fax prohibitor  
3. Replace the handset.  
Note:  
1 Press MMenuN repeatedly to display “JUNK FAX  
R To stop receiving, see page 108.  
PROH.”. A MEN  
How to receive calls and faxes with the cordless  
handset (KX-MB2060 optional)  
2 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “ON”. A  
MSetN  
1. Lift the cordless handset and press M N or M N to  
3 Press MStopN to exit.  
answer the call.  
2. When:  
8.8.2 Storing undesired callers  
–
–
–
document reception is required,  
a fax calling tone (slow beep) is heard, or  
no sound is heard,  
You can register up to 20 undesired numbers from the  
Caller ID list (page 54) if you do not wish to receive faxes  
from them.  
press MMENUN (soft key A).  
1 Press MMenuN repeatedly to display “JUNK FAX  
3. Select “Fax Start”, then press MSELECTN (soft  
PROH.”.  
key A).  
R You can also press MStartN and then M2N on the  
2 Press MEN repeatedly to display “JUNK LIST  
base unit.  
SET”. A MSetN  
How to receive faxes with an extension telephone  
3 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the party you  
do not want to receive faxes from. A MSetN  
If you have another telephone connected to the same line  
(extension telephone), you can use the extension  
telephone to receive faxes.  
4 Press MStopN 2 times to exit.  
1. When the extension telephone rings, lift the handset  
To display the junk fax prohibitor list  
of the extension telephone.  
1. Press MMenuN repeatedly to display “JUNK FAX  
2. When:  
PROH.”.  
–
–
–
document reception is required,  
a fax calling tone (slow beep) is heard, or  
no sound is heard,  
2. Press MEN repeatedly to display “JUNK LIST  
DISP.”. A MSetN  
3. Press MCN or MDN to display the items on the list.  
press MGN MBN M9N (default fax activation code)  
firmly.  
4. Press MStopN to exit.  
3. Replace the handset.  
To print the junk fax prohibitor list  
Note:  
1. Press MMenuN repeatedly to display “JUNK FAX  
PROH.”.  
R To stop receiving, see page 108.  
R To receive fax documents using the extension  
telephone, make sure remote fax activation is turned  
ON (feature #434 on page 85) beforehand. The  
default setting is ON.  
2. Press MEN repeatedly to display “JUNK LIST  
PRINT”. A MSetN  
3. Press MStopN to exit.  
To erase an item from the junk fax prohibitor list  
1. Press MMenuN repeatedly to display “JUNK FAX  
8.8 Junk fax prohibitor  
(preventing fax reception from  
undesired callers)  
If you subscribe to Caller ID service (page 54), this  
feature prevents fax reception from calls that do not show  
caller information.  
PROH.”.  
2. Press MEN repeatedly to display “JUNK LIST  
DISP.”. A MSetN  
3. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
item. A MEraseN  
R To cancel erasing, press MStopN, then press  
MMenuN.  
Additionally, the unit will not accept faxes originating from  
numbers that match the ones on a programmable junk  
fax prohibitor list.  
4. MSetN A MMenuN  
Important:  
8.9 Receiving a fax on your  
computer  
R This feature does not work if you receive faxes  
manually.  
You can receive a fax document on your computer. The  
received fax document is saved as an image file  
(TIFF-G4 format).  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
8. Fax  
Important:  
Important:  
R Make sure the PC fax setting is set to “ALWAYS”  
or “CONNECTED” beforehand (feature #442 on  
page 86).  
R Make sure the computer setting for the PC fax  
reception is set beforehand (feature #443 on  
page 30).  
R Make sure the fax preview mode is turned OFF  
beforehand (feature #448 on page 66) (LAN  
connection only).  
R Web fax preview will not be activated when using  
the unit for the first time. To activate this feature,  
set the following:  
–
“8.10.1 Activating the fax preview mode”,  
page 66.  
–
“8.10.2 Programming the web fax preview  
access code”, page 66.  
8.10.1 Activating the fax preview mode  
1 Press MAuto AnswerN repeatedly to turn the auto  
1
MMenuN A MBNM4NM4NM8N  
answer setting ON (page 62).  
2 Press M1N to select “ON”.  
2 Start Multi-Function Station. A [PC FAX]  
R Press M0N to select “OFF”.  
3 When a fax call is received, your computer will  
3
MSetN A MMenuN  
receive a document through the unit.  
Note:  
Note:  
R If you select “ON”, the PC fax setting (feature #442  
on page 86) will be deactivated.  
R You can view, print or transfer the received document  
using your computer.  
R We recommend you to activate the notification of fax  
reception (feature #451 on page 86). The selected  
computer will receive the notification when the  
memory becomes full of received documents.  
R Messages transferred to your computer will be  
deleted from the unit.  
Viewing a received document  
1. Select [PC FAX] from Multi-Function Station.  
2. Select [Received Log] in [Communication Log].  
8.10.2 Programming the web fax preview  
access code  
1
MMenuN A MBNM4NM5NM0N A MSetN  
2 Enter the password (feature #155 on page 79).  
A MSetN  
3 Enter the web fax preview access code, up to 8  
characters, using the English alphabet and numbers  
(see page 106 for character entry).  
R The following symbols can also be entered using  
M0N or M1N.  
3. Click the item you want to view.  
! @ # $ % ^ & ’ ) ( . – _ { }  
4. Click [File] in the menu bar, then select [View], or  
click the [View] icon in the toolbar.  
4
MSetN A MMenuN  
Note:  
R The received fax will be displayed.  
R If the web fax preview access code is not  
programmed (blank), the web fax preview feature will  
not be activated.  
If a received fax document is stored in the unit’s  
memory  
You can load the document into your computer.  
1. Select [PC FAX] from Multi-Function Station.  
2. Select [Received Log] in [Communication Log].  
8.10.3 Displaying a received fax document on  
the web browser  
3. Click [File] in the menu bar. A [Receive a Fax]  
R If the PC fax setting (feature #442 on page 86)  
is activated, the received fax document will be  
automatically transferred to the computer.  
Important:  
R Make sure that the unit is idle.  
1 Start Multi-Function Station.  
2 [Utilities] A [Configuration Web Page] A  
[Device Configuration]  
8.10 Web fax preview (LAN  
connection only)  
3 Type “root” as the user name, then enter the  
password (feature #155 on page 79). A [OK]  
You can display a received fax document in your web  
browser, and print or save the necessary document after  
you confirm the image.  
4 Select the [WEB FAX PREVIEW] tab.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
8. Fax  
5 Enter the web fax preview access code (feature #450  
on page 66). A [Submit]  
R A list of the received fax documents will be  
displayed.  
6 Click the desired icon to preview, print or save a fax  
document.  
R While previewing the document, you can  
manipulate the fax document (Example: enlarge,  
rotate etc.).  
7 Close the web browser.  
Note:  
R The display speed depends on the contents and size  
of the document.  
R The received fax document is saved as an image file  
(PDF format). Adobe Reader is required to view it.  
What “ ” means  
“
” on the display means the image has already been  
viewed, printed or saved.  
R To delete a document after viewing a fax document  
in step 6, click [Back] to go back to the list. You can  
delete images showing “ ”.  
R To delete a document after printing or saving a fax  
document in step 6, click [Reload] to update the list.  
You can delete images showing “ ”.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
9. Distinctive Ring  
Telephone  
number  
Ring pattern  
Use  
9.1 Distinctive Ring service  
012 5678  
012 9876  
Double ring  
Triple ring  
Business  
Fax  
When a call is made to one of your phone numbers, the  
telephone company sends a ring pattern to your  
telephone line to indicate which number the call is  
intended for. By setting up this unit for Distinctive Ring,  
you can make the unit automatically start fax reception  
when a call comes to the fax number.  
To use this service, you must subscribe to the  
Distinctive Ring service offered by your local  
telephone company. Consult your local telephone  
company for availability.  
9. . Distinctive Ring  
To use one phone number for the fax, program the ring  
pattern assigned for the fax (feature #431 on page 68).  
In the example, the ring pattern assigned for fax is a triple  
ring, so you should program “C” (triple ring).  
Ring pattern  
Selection  
Standard ring (one long ring)  
M1N “A”  
9.2 Using two or more phone  
numbers on a single telephone  
line  
1st ring  
2nd ring  
Double ring (two short rings)  
M2N “B”  
9.2.1 Activating the Distinctive Ring feature  
1st ring  
2nd ring  
1
MMenuN A MBNM4NM3NM0N  
Triple ring (short-long-short rings) M3N “C”  
2 Press M1N to select “ON”.  
R Press M0N to select “OFF”.  
1st ring  
2nd ring  
3
MSetN A MMenuN  
Other triple ring (short-short-long M4N “D”  
rings)  
How phone calls and faxes are received  
If the incoming call is for the fax number, the unit will ring  
with the assigned ring pattern and automatically start fax  
reception.  
1st ring  
Note:  
2nd ring  
If the incoming call is for the phone number:  
–
–
the unit will keep on ringing in TEL mode.  
the unit will record a voice message in TAM/FAX  
mode.  
R The default setting is M5N “B-D”. The fax will respond  
to all calls with ring tone patterns “B”, “C” and “D”.  
–
fax communication will be attempted in FAX ONLY  
mode.  
9.4 Programming the ring pattern  
assigned for fax  
Note:  
R Be sure to select a tone (Tone 1 to 5) as the cordless  
handset ringer tone (feature #161 on page 101). If  
you select a melody, you will not be able to  
distinguish lines by their ringers.  
1 Set feature #430 to “ON” (page 68).  
2
MMenuN A MBNM4NM3NM1N  
3 Press M1N to M5N to select the ring pattern assigned  
for fax. A MSetN A MMenuN  
9.3 Using three or more phone  
numbers on a single telephone  
line  
You may wish to use three or more phone numbers for  
a single telephone line. In order to distinguish which  
number the call was addressed to, a different ring pattern  
must be assigned for each number.  
Example: Using three phone numbers  
Telephone  
number  
Ring pattern  
Use  
012 1234  
Standard ring  
Personal  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
10. Answering Machine  
–
If you change the setting from 60 seconds to 16  
seconds, your current greeting message will be  
deleted. The pre-recorded greeting message will  
be played when a call is received.  
10.1 Recording your greeting  
message  
10. . Answering Machine  
The unit has 2 pre-recorded greeting messages for TAM/  
FAX mode. If you record your own greeting message, it  
will be played instead of the pre-recorded greeting  
message when a call is received.  
The maximum recording time of your greeting message  
is either 16 seconds (default) or 60 seconds. We  
recommend you record a message of less than 12  
seconds to make it easier to receive faxes.  
Make sure feature #400 is set to “TAM/FAX” beforehand  
(page 81).  
R If you change the maximum recording time of  
incoming messages to “GREET ONLY”/“Greeting  
only” (feature #305 on page 76, 88), the unit will  
answer a call with your current greeting message,  
and then hang up. Re-record your greeting message  
to inform the caller that the unit will not record any  
incoming messages.  
10.1.1 Erasing your recorded greeting  
message  
Important:  
1
2
MEraseN A MEraseN A MSetN  
R Only 1 person can access the answering machine  
(listen to messages, record a greeting message,  
etc.) at a time.  
MSetN  
R To cancel erasing, press MStopN.  
R When callers leave messages, the unit records  
the day and time of each message. Make sure the  
date and time have been set correctly (page 28).  
Note:  
R If you erase your TAM/FAX greeting message, the  
pre-recorded greeting message will be played when  
a call is received.  
MEraseN MRecordN  
10.2 Leaving a voice message for  
others or yourself (Memo  
recording)  
You can record a voice memo to leave a private message  
for yourself or someone else. Recorded messages are  
treated as new messages.  
1
MRecordN A MRecordN A MSetN  
2 Lift the handset.  
R A long beep will sound.  
3 Speak clearly to record a voice message.  
4 When finished recording, press MStopN.  
5 Replace the handset.  
MSetN  
MStopN  
Note:  
1
MRecordN A MSetN  
2 Lift the handset.  
R A long beep will sound.  
R To play back the voice message, see page 70.  
R If you record for over 3 minutes, the unit will stop  
recording.  
3 Speak clearly to record your own greeting message.  
4 When finished recording, press MStopN.  
10.3 Recording a telephone  
conversation  
5 Replace the handset.  
R The greeting message will be played.  
You can record a telephone conversation on the unit.  
Recorded messages are treated as new messages.  
Note:  
R You can change the maximum TAM/FAX greeting  
message time to 60 seconds (feature #315 on  
page 88).  
1 Press MRecordN during a conversation.  
R “2WAY RECORDING” will be displayed, then the  
unit will start recording automatically.  
–
If you change the setting to 60 seconds, we  
recommend that you tell the caller in your TAM/  
FAX greeting message to press G9 before  
starting the fax transmission.  
2 Press MStopN to stop recording.  
Note:  
R To play back the voice message, see page 70.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
10. Answering Machine  
R There may be legal restrictions on recording two-way  
telephone conversations. Inform the other party that  
the conversation is being recorded.  
10.4.3 Erasing voice messages  
To erase a specific message  
Press MEraseN while listening to the message you want  
to erase.  
10.4 Listening to voice messages  
When the unit has recorded new voice messages:  
To erase all messages  
1. MEraseN A MSetN  
–
–
The MPlaybackN light will flash.  
The total number of voice messages will flash on the  
base unit display.  
2. MSetN  
R To cancel erasing, press MStopN.  
MPlaybackN MEraseN MStopN  
MMenuN  
MSetNMFNMEN  
10.4.1 To play back messages  
Press MPlaybackN.  
R When MPlaybackN light is flashing;  
The new voice messages will be played.  
When MPlaybackN light is lit (not flashing);  
All the voice messages will be played.  
R To transfer the voice message to email address, see  
page 71.  
R To transfer the voice message to a computer, see  
page 71.  
10.4.2 Useful features during playback  
To repeat a message  
Press MFN while listening to the message.  
R If you press MFN within 5 seconds of the beginning of  
the message, the previous message will be played.  
R To play back a specific message, press MFN or MEN  
and search for the message you want to listen to.  
To skip a message  
Press MEN to play the next message.  
Voice time/day stamp  
During playback, the unit will announce the day of the  
week and time that each message was recorded.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
10. Answering Machine  
1 During playback, press MVoice to PCN.  
10.5 Transferring a specific voice  
message to email address (voice  
to email address) (LAN  
R Playing back will be stopped.  
2 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “PC”. A  
MSetN  
3 For USB connection:  
connection only)  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “USB HOST”.  
You can send a specific voice message (incoming,  
memo recording and telephone conversation messages)  
as an email attachment. The voice message is attached  
as an audio file in WAVE (µ-Law) format.  
For LAN connection:  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the computer to  
which you want to send the voice message.  
Important:  
4 Press MSetN to start transferring.  
R Program the email server settings (page 97) and  
5 After transfer is finished, “ERASE MESSAGE?” will be  
displayed.  
the email destinations (page 98) beforehand.  
1 During playback, press MVoice to PCN.  
R To erase the transferred message, press MSetN.  
R To leave the message in the unit, press MStopN.  
R Playing back will be stopped.  
2 Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select “EMAIL  
6 “PLAYBACK NEXT?” will be displayed.  
ADDRESS”. A MSetN  
R To continue transfer other voice messages, press  
MSetN, then repeat steps 1 to 4.  
R To exit from this feature, press MStopN.  
3 Enter the destination email address.  
Using station 1-3:  
Press the desired station key.  
Note:  
R To listen to the voice messages on your computer,  
Using station 4-6:  
see page 72.  
Press MLowerN, then press the desired station key.  
Using navigator key:  
Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to select the desired  
destination.  
Using dial keypad:  
Press MSetN, then enter the email address using the  
dial keypad (page 106).  
4 Press MSetN to start transferring.  
5 After transfer is finished, “ERASE MESSAGE?” will be  
displayed.  
R To erase the transferred message, press MSetN.  
R To leave the message in the unit, press MStopN.  
6 “PLAYBACK NEXT?” will be displayed.  
R To continue transfer other voice messages, press  
MSetN, then repeat steps 1 to 4.  
R To exit from this feature, press MStopN.  
Note:  
R The maximum size of the voice message that can be  
sent is 5 MB (approximately 7 minutes) including the  
header and email message.  
10.6 Transferring a specific voice  
message to a computer (voice to  
PC)  
You can send a specific voice message (incoming,  
memo recording and telephone conversation messages)  
to a computer after you play back the voice message.  
The voice message is attached as an audio file in WAVE  
(µ-Law) format.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
10. Answering Machine  
Note:  
10.7 Receiving all incoming voice  
messages on your computer  
R For details about the [Multi-Function PC TAM], click  
[
], then click the desired item.  
You can receive all incoming voice messages on your  
computer automatically. The received voice message is  
saved as an audio file in WAVE (µ-Law) format.  
Important:  
R To use this feature, check the following settings  
beforehand:  
–
–
–
PC TAM setting is set to “ALWAYS” (feature  
#365 on page 88).  
PC TAM reception is set (feature #366 on  
page 30).  
The receiving mode is set to TAM/FAX mode  
(page 62).  
Note:  
R Memo recording (page 69) and conversation  
recording (page 69) will not be transferred.  
How voice messages are received  
When a voice message is recorded on the unit, your  
computer will receive the voice message through the  
unit.  
Note:  
R [Multi-Function PC TAM] window appears  
automatically after the voice message is received on  
your computer. To listen to the voice message, see  
step 3 on “10.7.1 Listening to voice messages”,  
page 72.  
R Messages transferred to your computer will be  
deleted from the unit.  
10.7.1 Listening to voice messages  
1 Start Multi-Function Station.  
2 [Utilities] A [PC TAM]  
R [Multi-Function PC TAM] will appear.  
3 Select the desired message type in [Voice Message  
Log].  
4 Select the item you want to listen to, then click the  
playback icon (A) to start playing back the voice  
message.  
A
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
10. Answering Machine  
5 Enter the web voice playback code (feature #368 on  
page 73). A [Submit]  
10.8 Listening to voice messages  
via a web browser (web voice  
playback) (LAN connection only)  
You can play back a received voice message in your web  
browser, and save the necessary message as an audio  
file in WAVE (µ-Law) format.  
R A list of the received voice messages will be  
displayed.  
6 Click the desired icon to play back, save or delete a  
voice message.  
R While playing back the voice message, you can  
manipulate it. (Example: stop, volume control  
etc.)  
R If the playback icon is not displayed or does not  
activate properly, save as a file, then play it. (This  
depends on your computer environment.)  
Important:  
R Web voice playback will not be activated when  
using the unit for the first time. To activate this  
feature, set the following:  
7 Close the web browser.  
–
“10.8.1 Activating the web voice playback  
mode”, page 73.  
“10.8.2 Programming the web voice playback  
code”, page 73.  
Note:  
–
R The voice messages can be saved as an audio file  
(WAV format).  
10.8.1 Activating the web voice playback  
mode  
10.9 Operating from a remote  
location  
1
MMenuN A MBNM3NM6NM7N  
Using a touch-tone telephone, you can call your  
telephone number from outside and access the unit to  
listen to messages or change auto answer settings. The  
unit’s voice guidance prompts you to press certain dial  
keys to perform different operations.  
2 Press M1N to select “ON”.  
R Press M0N to select “OFF”.  
3
MSetN A MMenuN  
10.8.2 Programming the web voice playback  
code  
Important:  
R To use this feature:  
–
–
–
–
Program the remote operation ID beforehand  
(feature #306 on page 76, 88).  
Set the unit to TAM/FAX mode before going  
out (page 62).  
Make sure PC TAM setting is set to “OFF”  
(feature #365 on page 88).  
1
MMenuN A MBNM3NM6NM8N A MSetN  
2 Enter the password (feature #155 on page 79).  
A MSetN  
3 Enter the web voice playback code, up to 8  
characters, using the English alphabet and numbers  
(see page 106 for character entry).  
R The following symbols can also be entered using  
M0N or M1N.  
Use a touch tone telephone for remote  
operations.  
! @ # $ % ^ & ’ ) ( . – _ { }  
10.9.1 Summary of remote operation  
4
MSetN A MMenuN  
1 Call your unit.  
Note:  
2 Enter the remote operation ID during or after the  
R If the web voice playback code is not programmed  
(blank), the web voice playback feature will not be  
activated.  
TAM/FAX greeting message.  
3 When there are new voice messages  
1. A long beep will sound.  
10.8.3 Listening to voice messages  
2. Short beep(s) will sound up to 8 times.  
R This indicates the number of new messages.  
Important:  
3. New messages will be played back.  
R Make sure that the unit is idle.  
When there are no new messages  
1. A long beep will sound (short beep will not sound).  
2. Press M5N.  
1 Start Multi-Function Station.  
2 [Utilities] A [Configuration Web Page] A  
[Device Configuration]  
3. All the voice messages will be played back.  
3 Type “root” as the user name, then enter the  
password (feature #155 on page 79). A [OK]  
4 To end remote operation press M9N, then hang up.  
4 Select the [WEB VOICE PLAYBACK] tab.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
10. Answering Machine  
Note:  
10.9.2 Remote operation using remote  
commands  
R You cannot turn ON the auto answer setting when the  
unit is set to TEL mode during the time periods set  
for silent mode (page 50).  
1 Call your unit.  
2 Enter the remote operation ID during or after the  
TAM/FAX greeting message.  
10.10 Using the answering  
machine with the cordless  
handset (KX-MB2060 optional)  
3 Enter a remote command within 10 seconds.  
Note:  
R When you press a key, press firmly.  
The maximum recording time of your greeting message  
is either 16 seconds (default) or 60 seconds.  
Key  
Remote command  
Helpful hints:  
M1N  
Repeat message (during  
playback)  
R To activate TAM/FAX mode with the cordless  
*1  
handset, see page 63.  
M2N  
M4N  
M5N  
M6N  
M7N  
M9N  
Skip message (during playback)  
Play new messages  
Important:  
R Only 1 person can access the answering machine  
(listen to messages, record a greeting message,  
etc.) at a time.  
R When callers leave messages, the unit records  
the day and time of each message. Make sure the  
date and time have been set correctly (page 28).  
Play all messages  
Play greeting message  
Record greeting message  
*2  
Stop current operation  
M0N  
Turn OFF auto answer setting  
Erase currently playing message  
Erase all messages  
MGNM4N  
MGNM5N  
MGNM6N  
A
Erase greeting message (during  
*3  
MCN  
greeting message playback)  
MOFFN  
MGNMBN  
End remote operation  
MCNMDNMFNMEN  
*1 If pressed within the first 5 seconds of a message,  
the previous message is played.  
*2 To resume operation, press a command key within  
10 seconds.  
*3 Unit resets to a pre-recorded greeting message.  
10.10.1 Recording your greeting message  
Recording a marker message  
1
MMENUN (soft key A) A M#NM3NM0NM2N  
After playing back the messages, you can leave an  
additional message.  
2 “Yes” A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
1. Wait for 3 beeps indicating the end of the remote  
3 After a beep sounds, hold the cordless handset about  
20 cm (8 inches) away and speak clearly into the  
microphone (60 seconds max.).  
operation.  
2. Wait about 10 seconds.  
3. Hear the voice guide and/or hear 1 beep.  
4. Leave a message.  
4 Press MSTOPN (soft key A) to stop recording.  
R The greeting message will be played.  
5
MOFFN  
To turn ON the auto answer setting  
1. Call your unit and let it ring 10 rings.  
To check the greeting message  
1. MMENUN (soft key A) A M#NM3NM0NM3N  
2. MOFFN  
R A beep will sound.  
2. Enter the remote operation ID (feature #306 on  
page 76, 88) within 10 seconds.  
R The receiving mode will be set to TAM/FAX or  
FAX ONLY mode, depending on the setting of  
feature #400 (page 81).  
To reset to a pre-recorded greeting message  
If you want to use a pre-recorded greeting message once  
you record your own greeting message, you need to  
erase your own greeting message.  
3. Hang up the handset.  
1. MMENUN (soft key A) A M#NM3NM0NM4N  
2. MYESN (soft key A) A MOFFN  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
10. Answering Machine  
2. “Edit & Call” A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
Using a pre-recorded greeting message  
3. Press MEDITN (soft key A) repeatedly until the  
The unit provides 2 pre-recorded greeting messages:  
telephone number is shown in the desired format  
–
If you erase or do not record your own greeting  
message, the unit plays a pre-recorded greeting  
asking callers to leave a message.  
(page 55). A M  
N
10.10.4 Erasing voice messages  
–
If the message recording time (feature #305 on  
page 76, 88) is set to “GREET ONLY”/  
“Greeting only”, callers’ messages are not  
recorded and the unit plays a different pre-recorded  
greeting message asking callers to call again.  
To erase a specific message  
Press MGNM4N while listening to the message you want  
to erase.  
To erase all messages  
10.10.2 Recording a telephone conversation  
1. MMENUN (soft key A) A M#NM3NM2NM5N  
2. “Yes” A MSELECTN (soft key A) A MOFFN  
1 Press MHNMBNM1N during a conversation.  
2 Press MHNMBNM2N to stop recording.  
10.10.5 Direct command operation  
10.10.3 Listening to voice messages  
You can operate the answering machine by pressing dial  
keys, rather than navigating through the menus. To use  
the following commands, press MMENUN (soft key A).  
A “Answering device” A MSELECTN (soft key  
A)  
When new messages have been recorded:  
–
“New message” is displayed.  
–
The message indicator on the cordless handset  
flashes slowly if the message alert feature is turned  
ON (feature #340 on page 76).  
Key  
Direct commands  
1 To listen to new messages:  
MCN or MDN  
Adjust the receiver or speaker volume  
(during playback)  
MPLAYN (soft key A)  
or  
MMENUN (soft key A) A M#NM3NM2NM3N  
R If there are no new messages in the answering  
machine, MPLAYN (soft key A) is not displayed.  
*1  
M1N or MFN  
Repeat message (during playback)  
M2N or MEN  
M3N  
Skip message (during playback)  
Enter the “Settings” menu  
Play new messages  
To listen to all messages:  
M4N  
MMENUN (soft key A) A M#NM3NM2NM4N  
M5N  
Play all messages  
2 When finished, press MOFFN.  
M6N  
Play greeting message  
M7NM6N  
M8N  
Record greeting message  
Turn auto answer setting ON  
Note:  
R To switch to the receiver, press M N.  
*2  
MPAUSEN  
(soft key  
A)  
Pause message  
To repeat a message  
Press M1N while listening to the message.  
R If you press M1N within first 5 seconds of a message,  
the previous message is played.  
M9N or  
MSTOPN  
(soft key  
A)  
Stop recording  
Stop playback  
To skip a message  
Press M2N to play the next message.  
M0N  
Turn auto answer setting OFF  
Erase currently playing message  
*3  
To stop playback  
MGNM4N  
Press MSTOPN (soft key A).  
MGNM5N  
Erase all messages  
MGNM6N  
Reset to a pre-recorded greeting  
message  
If you subscribe to Caller ID service  
If caller information is received for the call, you can call  
the caller back while listening to a message.  
*1 If pressed within the first 5 seconds of a message,  
the previous message is played.  
1. Press MPAUSEN (soft key A) during playback.  
*2 To resume playback:  
2. “Call back” A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
“Playback” A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
Note:  
*3 You can also erase as follows:  
MERASEN (soft key A) A “Yes” A MSELECTN  
(soft key A)  
To edit the number before calling back;  
1. Press MPAUSEN (soft key A) during playback.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
10. Answering Machine  
Select “Greeting only” in step 2 on “To change the  
maximum recording time for incoming messages”,  
page 76.  
10.10.6 Programming for answering machine  
To set the remote operation ID  
Note:  
A 3-digit remote access code must be entered when  
operating the answering machine remotely. This code  
prevents unauthorized parties from listening to your  
messages remotely. The default setting is “111”.  
R When you select “Greeting only”:  
–
If you do not record your own message, the unit  
will play the pre-recorded greeting-only message  
asking callers to call again later.  
If you use your own message, record the  
greeting-only message asking callers to call  
again later (feature #302 on page 74).  
Important:  
–
R To prevent unauthorized access to this product,  
we recommend that you regularly change the  
remote code.  
R You can also program this feature with the base unit  
1. MMENUN (soft key A) A M#NM3NM0NM6N  
2. Enter the desired 3-digit remote access code.  
3. MSAVEN (soft key A) A MOFFN  
(feature #305 on page 88).  
Message alert  
You can select whether or not the message indicator on  
the cordless handset flashes slowly when new  
messages are recorded. The default setting is “On”.  
To deactivate remote operation  
Press MGN in step 2 on “To set the remote operation  
ID”, page 76.  
R The entered remote access code is deleted.  
Important:  
R If you stored the voice mail access number, the  
message indicator also flashes for newly  
recorded voice mail messages.  
Note:  
R You can also program this feature with the base unit  
(feature #306 on page 88).  
1. MMENUN (soft key A) A M#NM3NM4NM0N  
2. Select the desired setting. A MSAVEN (soft key A)  
To change the ring count in TAM/FAX mode  
A MOFFN  
You can change the number of times the unit rings“Ring  
count” before the unit answers a call.  
Note:  
You can select 2 to 4 rings, or “Toll saver”.  
The default setting is “2 rings”.  
R While message alert is on, battery operating time is  
shortened (page 22).  
“Toll saver”: The unit answers after 2 or 3 rings when  
new messages have been recorded, and after 4 or 5  
rings when there are no new messages. If you call your  
unit from a remote location to listen to new messages  
(page 73), you will know that there are no new messages  
when the unit rings for the 4th time. You can then hang  
up without being charged for the call.  
1. MMENUN (soft key A) A M#NM2NM1NM1N  
2. Select the desired setting. A MSAVEN (soft key A)  
A MOFFN  
Note:  
R You can also program this feature with the base unit  
(feature #211 on page 80).  
To change the maximum recording time for  
incoming messages  
You can change the maximum message recording time  
allowed for each caller. The default setting is “3 min”.  
1. MMENUN (soft key A) A M#NM3NM0NM5N  
2. Select the desired setting. A MSAVEN (soft key A)  
A MOFFN  
To select “Greeting only”  
You can select “Greeting only” which sets the unit  
to announce a greeting message to callers but not record  
messages.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
11. Programmable Features  
11.1 Base unit programming  
11. . Programmable Features  
MSetN  
MMenuN  
1
MMenuN  
2 Press MBN and the 3-digit code (page 78 to  
page 96).  
3 Press the appropriate selection to display the desired  
setting.  
R This step will vary depending on the feature.  
4
MSetN  
5 Press MMenuN to exit.  
To select features through the web browser interface  
(LAN connection only)  
You can change features through the web browser  
interface instead of the base unit.  
1. Start Multi-Function Station. A [Utilities] A  
[Configuration Web Page]  
R You can also access the unit by entering its IP  
address on the web browser.  
2. Select the desired category from the menu bar.  
[Device Configuration]: features of the unit  
[Network Configuration]: network features  
3. Type “root” as the user name, then enter the  
password (feature #155 on page 79). A [OK]  
4. Select the desired feature tab at the top of the right  
frame.  
5. Change the settings or edit the information.  
R This step will vary depending on the feature.  
6. [Submit]  
R The new setting will be transferred to the unit.  
7. Close the web browser.  
Note:  
R The settings displayed in the web browser will be  
updated by clicking [Reload].  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11. Programmable Features  
11.1.1 Basic features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Setting the quick setup  
MBNM1NM0NM0N  
You can print out the quick fax setup guide and select the desired receiving  
mode depending on your situation.  
M1N “TAM/FAX” (default): Use as a telephone answering machine and/or fax  
(page 62).  
M2N “DIST. RING”: With the Distinctive Ring service (page 68).  
M3N “TEL ONLY”: Mostly phone calls (page 64).  
M4N “FAX ONLY”: Use only as a fax (page 63).  
1. MMenuN A MBNM1NM0NM0N  
2. MSetN  
3. Press MSetN again to print the quick fax setup guide.  
R If you do not wish to print it, press MStopN.  
4. Press M1N to M4N to display the desired setting.  
5. MSetN A MMenuN  
*1  
Enter the date and time using the dial keypad. See page 28 for details.  
Setting the date and time  
MBNM1NM0NM1N  
Setting your logo  
Enter your logo using the dial keypad. See page 29 for details.  
MBNM1NM0NM2N  
Setting your fax number  
Enter your fax number using the dial keypad. See page 29 for details.  
MBNM1NM0NM3N  
*2  
The display and reports will be in the selected language.  
M1N “ENGLISH” (default): English is used.  
M2N “SPANISH”: Spanish is used.  
Selecting the language  
MBNM1NM1NM0N  
1. MMenuN A MBNM1NM1NM0N  
2. Press M1N or M2N to select the desired language. A MSetN A MMenuN  
Setting the dialing mode for  
the base unit, and cordless  
handset (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
M1N “PULSE”  
M2N “TONE” (default)  
See page 24 for details.  
MBNM1NM2NM0N  
Setting flash time for the base The flash time depends on your telephone exchange or host PBX.  
unit, and cordless handset  
(KX-MB2060 optional)  
MBNM1NM2NM1N  
M0N “900ms”  
M1N “700ms” (default)  
M2N “600ms”  
M3N “400ms”  
M4N “300ms”  
M5N “250ms”  
M6N “200ms”  
M7N “160ms”  
M8N “110ms”  
M9N “100ms”  
MGN “90ms”  
MBN “80ms”  
Note:  
R If the unit is connected via a PBX, PBX functions (transferring a call, etc.)  
might not work correctly. Consult your PBX supplier for the correct setting.  
Changing the LCD display  
contrast  
M1N “NORMAL” (default)  
M2N “DARKER”  
*2  
MBNM1NM4NM5N  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
11. Programmable Features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Selecting the scale  
M1N “MILLIMETERS”  
MBNM1NM4NM7N  
M2N “INCHES” (default)  
Note:  
R The selected scale will be used when measurements are shown on the base  
unit’s display.  
Changing the password for  
feature programming via  
remote operation  
1. MMenuN A MBNM1NM5NM5N A MSetN  
2. Enter the current password. A MSetN  
R The default password is “1234”.  
MBNM1NM5NM5N  
3. Enter a new 4-digit password using 0-9. A MSetN  
4. Enter the new password again. A MSetN A MMenuN  
Note:  
R It is recommended that you change this password from the default  
password.  
R This password is also used for feature programming via a web browser (LAN  
connection only).  
Setting the toner  
maintenance time  
MBNM1NM5NM8N  
The base unit will automatically activate for maintenance, once every 24 hours.  
Because this is to prevent the toner from solidifying, the noise that the base unit  
makes during maintenance cannot be stopped. However, if the base unit’s noise  
bothers you, you can change the start time.  
1. MMenuN A MBNM1NM5NM8N A MSetN  
2. Enter the maintenance start time.  
R The default time is “12:00PM”.  
R Press MGN repeatedly to select “AM” or “PM”.  
R If you select Spanish for the language (feature #110 on page 78), the  
default time is “12:00”.  
3. MSetN A MMenuN  
Resetting all features (and  
deleting all data in memory)  
MBNM1NM5NM9N  
Before you dispose of, transfer or return the product, activate this feature to  
reset all programmable features and to delete all data stored in memory.  
Phonebook (or caller information) and fax transmission data (journal report and  
faxes received in memory) will be deleted.  
M0N “NO” (default)  
M1N “YES”  
R Disconnect the telephone line cord, USB cable and LAN cable before  
activating this feature.  
R Date and time setting on the cordless handset programming will also be  
reset (page 99) (KX-MB2060 optional).  
To reset all features:  
1. MMenuN A MBNM1NM5NM9N  
2. Press M1N to select “YES”. A MSetN  
3. Press M1N to select “YES”. A MSetN  
Setting the ringtone for  
outside calls  
MBNM1NM6NM1N  
M1N “RINGTONE 1” (default)  
M2N “RINGTONE 2”  
M3N “RINGTONE 3”  
M4N “RINGTONE 4”  
M5N “RINGTONE 5”  
M6N “RINGTONE 6”  
*2  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
11. Programmable Features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Setting the beep sounds and  
keytones  
M0N “OFF”: Deactivate this feature.  
M1N “ON” (default): You will hear confirmation/error beep sounds and keytones.  
*2  
MBNM1NM6NM5N  
Note:  
R Even if this feature is set to “OFF”, the unit beeps in some cases. For  
example:  
–
the memory reception alert setting (feature #437 on page 85) is  
activated.  
–
the top cover is opened.  
Changing the ring count in  
FAX ONLY mode  
MBNM2NM1NM0N  
M1N “1”  
M2N “2”  
M3N “3” (default)  
M4N “4”  
Changing the ring count in  
TAM/FAX mode  
MBNM2NM1NM1N  
M0N “TOLL SAVER”  
M2N “2” (default)  
M3N “3”  
*1  
M4N “4”  
See page 63 for details.  
Note:  
R You can also program this feature with the cordless handset (feature #211  
on page 76) (KX-MB2060 optional).  
Setting the Caller ID list to  
print automatically  
MBNM2NM1NM6N  
M0N “OFF” (default): The Caller ID list will not be printed automatically, but the  
base unit will keep a record of the information for the last 50 callers.  
M1N “ON”: The Caller ID list will be printed automatically each time the base unit  
logs 50 callers (page 54).  
Setting the time adjustment  
MBNM2NM2NM6N  
Using this feature, the unit’s date and time setting will be automatically adjusted  
when caller information is received.  
M1N “AUTO” (default): The date and time setting will be automatically adjusted.  
M2N “MANUAL”: Deactivates this feature.  
Changing the time period for  
silent mode  
See page 50 for details.  
*2  
MBNM2NM3NM7N  
*2  
See page 50 for details.  
Setting the silent mode  
MBNM2NM3NM8N  
Setting the recording paper  
size in the paper input tray  
MBNM3NM8NM0N  
M1N “LETTER” (default): Letter-size paper  
M2N “A4”: A4-size paper  
M4N “B5(ISO)”: B5(ISO)-size paper  
M5N “B5(JIS)”: B5(JIS)-size paper  
M6N “16K”: 16K-size paper  
Note:  
R When “B5(ISO)”, “B5(JIS)” or “16K” is selected, received fax  
documents will be stored in memory.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
11. Programmable Features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Setting the recording paper  
size in the manual input tray  
MBNM3NM8NM1N  
M1N “LETTER” (default): Letter-size paper  
M2N “A4”: A4-size paper  
M3N “LEGAL”: Legal-size paper  
M4N “B5(ISO)”: B5(ISO)-size paper  
M5N “B5(JIS)”: B5(JIS)-size paper  
M6N “16K”: 16K-size paper  
M7N “8.5X13”  
M8N “8.5X13.4”  
Note:  
R When you set feature #147 to “MILLIMETERS”, the numbers are displayed  
in millimeters.  
2
2
Setting the recording paper  
type for paper input tray  
MBNM3NM8NM3N  
M1N “PLAIN PAPER” (default): 75 g/m to 90 g/m (20 lb to 24 lb) paper.  
2
2
M2N “THIN PAPER”: 64 g/m to 75 g/m (17 lb to 20 lb) paper.  
Note:  
R This setting will be deactivated when printing from a computer. To set the  
recording paper type for printing, see page 35.  
2
2
Setting the recording paper  
type for manual input tray  
MBNM3NM8NM4N  
M1N “PLAIN PAPER” (default): 75 g/m to 90 g/m (20 lb to 24 lb) paper.  
2
2
M2N “THIN PAPER”: 64 g/m to 75 g/m (17 lb to 20 lb) paper.  
Note:  
R This setting will be deactivated when printing from a computer. To set the  
recording paper type for printing, see page 35.  
Changing the receiving mode M1N “TAM/FAX” (default): Telephone Answering Machine/Fax mode (page 62)  
in the auto answer setting  
MBNM4NM0NM0N  
M2N “FAX ONLY”: Fax only mode (page 63)  
Setting the waiting time for  
the power save mode  
MBNM4NM0NM3N  
To set the length of time before the base unit enters power save mode.  
M1N “5min” (default): 5 minutes  
M2N “15min”: 15 minutes  
M3N “30min”: 30 minutes  
M4N “1h”: 1 hour  
Note:  
R When in power save mode, the unit needs to preheat the fuser unit before  
it can begin printing.  
Holding the previous contrast M0N “DISABLED” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
setting  
MBNM4NM6NM2N  
M1N “ENABLED”: The unit will hold the previous setting.  
Note:  
R The previous setting will be held individually for copying.  
R The previous setting will be held individually for sending faxes.  
Setting the default operation  
mode  
To select the default operation mode when the selected time of the mode timer  
(feature #464) passes.  
MBNM4NM6NM3N  
M1N “COPY” (default): Copy mode is selected as default.  
M2N “FAX”: Fax mode is selected as default.  
Note:  
R You cannot select the scan mode using this feature.  
Setting the default operation  
mode timer  
MBNM4NM6NM4N  
To set the timer before returning to the default operation mode (feature #463).  
M0N “OFF”: Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “30s”: 30 seconds  
M2N “1min” (default): 1 minute  
M3N “2min”: 2 minutes  
M4N “5min”: 5 minutes  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
11. Programmable Features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Setting toner save feature  
M0N “OFF” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
MBNM4NM8NM2N  
M1N “ON”: The toner cartridge will last longer.  
Note:  
R This feature may lower the print quality by reducing toner consumption.  
R This setting is valid for copying, and when the unit automatically prints  
reports/lists.  
R This setting is invalid for printing received faxes.  
*1 When this setting is changed using the base unit, the setting for the cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional) will  
also be changed, and vice versa.  
*2 This setting can be changed individually for the base unit, and the cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional).  
–
–
–
–
–
To set the cordless handset language, see feature #110 on page 103.  
To set the cordless handset LCD display contrast, see feature #145 on page 102.  
To set the cordless handset ringtone for outside calls, see feature #161 on page 101.  
To set the cordless handset keytone, see feature #165 on page 102.  
To set the cordless handset silent mode, see feature #237 and feature #238 on page 51.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
11. Programmable Features  
11.1.2 Fax features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Erasing all items stored for  
the one-touch dial and shared  
phonebook  
M0N “NO” (default)  
M1N “YES”  
R Disconnect the telephone line cord, USB cable and LAN cable before  
MBNM2NM8NM9N  
activating this feature.  
To erase all items:  
1. MMenuN A MBNM2NM8NM9N  
2. Press M1N to select “YES”. A MSetN  
3. Press M1N to select “YES”. A MSetN A MMenuN  
Printing a confirmation  
report  
MBNM4NM0NM1N  
M0N “OFF”: Confirmation reports will not be printed.  
M1N “ON”: A confirmation report will be printed after every fax transmission.  
M2N “ERROR” (default): A confirmation report will be printed only when fax  
transmission fails.  
Setting the journal report to  
print automatically  
MBNM4NM0NM2N  
M0N “OFF”: The unit will not print a journal report, but will keep a record of the  
last 30 fax transmissions and receptions.  
M1N “ON” (default): The unit will print a journal report automatically after every  
30 new fax transmissions and receptions (page 57).  
Sending documents  
overseas  
MBNM4NM1NM1N  
If you cannot send a fax overseas even if the number is correct and the line is  
connected, activate this feature before sending the fax.  
This feature improves the reliability by reducing the transmission speed.  
M0N “OFF”: Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “NEXT FAX”: This setting is effective only for the next attempted fax  
transmission. After transmission, the unit will return to the previous setting.  
M2N “ERROR” (default): When the previous fax transmission fails and you wish  
to re-send the document.  
Note:  
R This feature is not available for broadcast transmission.  
R Calling charges may be higher than usual.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
11. Programmable Features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Sending a fax at a specific  
time  
MBNM4NM1NM2N  
This feature allows you to take advantage of low-cost calling hours offered by  
your telephone company. This feature can be set up to 24 hours in advance of  
the desired time.  
M0N “OFF” (default)  
M1N “ON”  
To send a document:  
1. If the MFaxN light is OFF, turn it ON by pressing MFaxN.  
2. Set the original (page 25).  
3. If necessary, change the resolution (page 57) and the contrast (page 57).  
4. MMenuN A MBNM4NM1NM2N  
5. Press M1N to select “ON”. A MSetN  
6. Enter the fax number.  
R To enter an item using one-touch dial feature and phonebook, see step  
3 on “8.2.1 Using the scanner glass”, page 58. (When using phonebook,  
you do not have to press MPhonebookN before pressing MCN or MDN.)  
7. MSetN  
8. Enter the transmission start time.  
R Press MGN repeatedly to select “AM” or “PM”.  
R If you select Spanish for the language (feature #110 on page 78), the  
time is set using a 24 hour clock.  
9. When using the scanner glass, press MSetN. A MStartN  
When using the automatic document feeder, press MSetN.  
R The document will be fed into the unit and scanned into memory. The  
unit will then send the data at the specified time. You cannot use this  
feature for another fax transmission until the former sending is  
completed.  
Note:  
R To cancel this setting after programming, press MStopN while the unit is idle,  
and then press MSetN.  
Setting the Error Correction  
Mode (ECM)  
This feature is available when the sending / receiving fax machines are ECM  
compatible.  
MBNM4NM1NM3N  
M0N “OFF”: Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ON” (default): Fax transmission / reception will be carried out so that the  
errors do not occur.  
Setting the connecting tone  
MBNM4NM1NM6N  
If you often have trouble when sending faxes, this feature allows you to hear  
connecting tones: fax tone, ring back tone and busy tone. You can use these  
tones to confirm the status of the other party’s machine.  
M0N “OFF”: Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ON” (default): You will hear connecting tones.  
Note:  
R If the ring back tone continues, the other party’s machine may not be a fax  
machine or may have run out of paper. Check with the other party.  
R The connecting tone volume cannot be adjusted.  
Setting the maximum fax  
speed  
MBNM4NM1NM8N  
M1N “14.4kbps”  
M2N “33.6kbps” (default)  
Note:  
R The fax speed maybe lower than the selected speed depending on your line.  
Setting the quick scan mode  
M0N “OFF” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
MBNM4NM1NM9N  
M1N “ALWAYS”: The unit will scan the document and store it into memory first,  
then the unit will start sending the documents. You can send faxes without  
pressing MQuick ScanN.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
11. Programmable Features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Activating the Distinctive  
Ring feature  
MBNM4NM3NM0N  
M0N “OFF” (default)  
M1N “ON”  
See page 68 for details.  
Setting the ring pattern for fax M1N “A”  
(Distinctive Ring feature)  
MBNM4NM3NM1N  
M2N “B”  
M3N “C”  
M4N “D”  
M5N “B-D” (default)  
See page 68 for details.  
Setting auto reduction  
feature  
MBNM4NM3NM2N  
To receive a fax document that is longer than your recording paper.  
M0N “OFF”: Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ON” (default): The unit will fit received documents onto your recording  
paper.  
Changing the fax activation  
code  
If you wish to use an extension telephone to receive faxes, activate this feature  
and program the activation code.  
MBNM4NM3NM4N  
M0N “OFF”  
M1N “ON” (default)  
1. MMenuN A MBNM4NM3NM4N  
2. Press M1N to select “ON”. A MSetN  
3. Enter your code from 2 to 4 digits, using 0-9, MGN and MBN.  
R The default code is “H#9”.  
4. MSetN A MMenuN  
Setting the memory reception To alert you with a beeping sound when a received fax document is stored into  
alert  
memory.  
MBNM4NM3NM7N  
M0N “OFF”: Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ON” (default): You will hear a beeping sound.  
Note:  
R If documents are stored into memory due to some printing problem, the  
beeps will continue until you solve the problem. If a message is displayed,  
see page 110 to page 112 for directions on printing out the stored  
documents. Make sure the unit is supplied with enough paper to print the  
stored document.  
R If documents are stored into memory due to activating the web fax preview  
(feature #448 on page 66), the base unit will not beep. However, the base  
unit will start to beep when the memory is nearly full.  
Setting friendly reception  
MBNM4NM3NM8N  
To receive a fax automatically when you answer a call and hear a fax calling  
tone (slow beep).  
M0N “OFF”: You have to press MStartN, and then M2N for fax reception using the  
base unit. You have to press MMENUN (soft key), select “Fax Start”, and then  
MSELECTN (soft key) for fax reception using the cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional).  
M1N “ON” (default): You do not have to press MStartN, and then M2N for fax  
reception using the base unit. You do not have to press MMENUN (soft key),  
select “Fax Start”, and then MSELECTN (soft key) for fax reception using the  
cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional).  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
11. Programmable Features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Receiving a fax into the  
computer  
If you wish to receive a fax into a computer, activate this feature and run [PC  
FAX] from Multi-Function Station.  
MBNM4NM4NM2N  
This feature is available when the fax preview mode is turned OFF (feature #448  
on page 66).  
M0N “OFF” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ALWAYS”: If the unit recognizes the connection to the computer, it will  
transfer received documents to the computer. If the unit cannot recognize the  
connection, it will store received documents into memory, and then transfer the  
data after recognition of the computer connection.  
M2N “CONNECTED”: If the unit recognizes the connection to the computer, it will  
transfer received documents to the computer. If the unit cannot recognize the  
connection, it will print the data.  
Setting the computer for PC  
fax reception  
To select the computer that will be used for receiving a fax. See page 30 for  
details.  
MBNM4NM4NM3N  
Setting the fax preview mode See page 66 for details.  
MBNM4NM4NM8N  
Setting the web fax preview  
access code  
See page 66 for details.  
MBNM4NM5NM0N  
Setting notification of fax  
reception  
MBNM4NM5NM1N  
M0N “OFF” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ON”: The computer connected to your unit using USB/LAN will receive a  
notification when a fax document is received.  
Note:  
R For LAN connection: Register computers to which fax reception  
notifications will be sent through the web browser interface (page 87).  
Setting the fax to email  
address  
If you wish to transfer a received fax document to desired email address,  
activate this feature.  
MBNM4NM5NM2N  
M0N “OFF” (default): Deactivate this feature.  
M1N “ON”: If you set the email destinations beforehand (page 87), the received  
fax document will be automatically transferred as an email attachment to the  
desired address.  
Resetting fax features/  
deleting faxes in memory  
MBNM4NM5NM9N  
M0N “NO” (default)  
M1N “YES”  
1. MMenuN A MBNM4NM5NM9N  
2. To reset the fax features to their default settings, press M1N to select  
“YES”. A MSetN A MSetN  
R If you do not want to reset the fax features to their default settings, press  
M0N to select “NO”. A MSetN  
3. To delete faxes in memory, press M1N to select “YES”. A MSetN A  
MSetN A MMenuN  
R If you do not want to delete faxes in memory, press M0N to select “NO”.  
A MSetN A MMenuN  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
11. Programmable Features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Setting the PC information for Select the PC to send fax reception notification message to (up to 6  
notification of fax reception  
(LAN connection only)  
R This feature can be  
destinations).  
1. Start Multi-Function Station.  
2. [Utilities] A [Configuration Web Page] A [Device Configuration]  
programmed only through  
the web browser interface.  
3. Type “root” as the user name, then enter the password (feature #155 on  
page 79). A [OK]  
4. Select the [FAX FEATURE] tab.  
5. Click [Edit] next to [RECEIVE PC LIST].  
6. Click [List] next to the desired destination.  
7. Click the desired PC from the list. A [Submit]  
8. Close the web browser.  
Setting the fax to email  
Select email destinations where you want to send received fax document  
destinations (LAN connection automatically (up to 6 destinations).  
only)  
Important:  
R This feature can be  
R Program the email server settings (page 97), and the email  
programmed only through  
the web browser interface.  
destinations (page 98) beforehand.  
1. Start Multi-Function Station.  
2. [Utilities] A [Configuration Web Page] A [Device Configuration]  
3. Type “root” as the user name, then enter the password (feature #155 on  
page 79). A [OK]  
4. Select the [FAX FEATURE] tab.  
5. Click [Edit] next to [DESTINATION].  
6. Click [Address Book] next to the desired destination.  
7. Click the desired name you want to send the received fax documents to.  
8. [Submit]  
9. Close the web browser.  
Note:  
R To check the status of the last 15 transfers, click [List] next to [RESULT] in  
step 5.  
*1 When this setting is changed using the base unit, the setting for the cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional) will  
also be changed, and vice versa.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11. Programmable Features  
11.1.3 TAM features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Selecting the voice prompt  
MBNM1NM1NM2N  
The voice guidance will be heard in the selected language.  
M1N “ENGLISH” (default): English is used.  
M2N “SPANISH”: Spanish is used.  
Changing the maximum  
M1N “1 MINUTE”  
recording time for incoming  
messages  
M2N “GREET ONLY”: The unit plays the greeting message but does not record  
any incoming messages.  
*1  
MBNM3NM0NM5N  
M3N “3 MINUTES” (default)  
Note:  
R You can also program this feature with the cordless handset (feature #305  
on page 76) (KX-MB2060 optional).  
Setting the remote operation  
ID  
MBNM3NM0NM6N  
1. MMenuN A MBNM3NM0NM6N  
*1  
2. To activate the remote operation feature, enter a 3-digit remote operation  
ID.  
R The default setting is “111”.  
R To deactivate the remote operation feature, press MGN.  
3. MSetN A MMenuN  
Note:  
R You can also program this feature with the cordless handset (feature #306  
on page 76) (KX-MB2060 optional).  
Screening the incoming call  
To hear an incoming call from the speaker when the answering machine is  
MBNM3NM1NM0N  
recording the message.  
M0N “OFF”  
M1N “ON” (default)  
Changing the greeting  
message time for TAM/FAX  
MBNM3NM1NM5N  
M1N “16s” (default): Maximum greeting message time is 16 seconds.  
M2N “60s”: Maximum greeting message time is 60 seconds.  
See page 69 for details.  
Receiving a voice message  
into the computer  
MBNM3NM6NM5N  
If you wish to receive a voice message into a computer, activate this feature.  
M0N “OFF” (default): Deactivate this feature.  
M1N “ALWAYS”: If the unit recognizes the connection to the computer, it will  
transfer recorded voice message to the computer. If the unit cannot recognize  
the connection, it will store the voice message into memory, and then transfer  
the data after recognition of the computer connection.  
Setting the computer for PC  
TAM reception  
To select the computer that will be used for receiving a voice message. See  
page 30 for details.  
MBNM3NM6NM6N  
Setting the web voice  
playback mode  
MBNM3NM6NM7N  
See page 73 for details.  
See page 73 for details.  
Setting the web voice  
playback access code  
MBNM3NM6NM8N  
Setting the TAM to email  
address  
If you wish to transfer an incoming voice message to desired email address,  
activate this feature.  
MBNM3NM6NM9N  
M0N “OFF” (default): Deactivate this feature.  
M1N “ON”: If you set the email destinations beforehand (page 89), the incoming  
voice message will be automatically transferred as an email attachment to the  
desired address. Memo recording (page 69) and conversation recording  
(page 69) will not be transferred.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
11. Programmable Features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Select email destinations where you want to send incoming voice messages  
Setting the TAM to email  
destinations (LAN connection automatically (up to 6 destinations).  
only)  
Important:  
R This feature can be  
R Program the email server settings (page 97), and the email  
programmed only through  
the web browser interface.  
destinations (page 98) beforehand.  
1. Start Multi-Function Station.  
2. [Utilities] A [Configuration Web Page] A [Device Configuration]  
3. Type “root” as the user name, then enter the password (feature #155 on  
page 79). A [OK]  
4. Select the [TAM FEATURE] tab.  
5. Click [Edit] next to [DESTINATION].  
6. Click [Address Book] next to the desired destination.  
7. Click the desired name you want to send the incoming voice messages to.  
8. [Submit]  
9. Close the web browser.  
Note:  
R To check the status of the last 15 transfers, click [List] next to [RESULT] in  
step 5.  
*1 When this setting is changed using the base unit, the setting for the cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional) will  
also be changed, and vice versa.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11. Programmable Features  
11.1.4 Copy features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Setting the input tray to use  
for copy  
MBNM4NM6NM0N  
M1N “#1” (default): The paper input tray is selected. The displayed paper size  
depends on the recording paper size setting (feature #380 on page 80).  
M2N “#2”: The manual input tray is selected. The displayed paper size depends  
on the recording paper size setting (feature #381 on page 81).  
Changing the default copy  
resolution  
MBNM4NM6NM1N  
To change the default resolution setting for copying.  
M1N “TEXT/PHOTO” (default): For documents containing both text and  
photographs.  
M2N “TEXT”: For documents containing only text.  
M3N “PHOTO”: For documents containing photographs, shaded drawings, etc.  
Holding the previous page  
layout setting  
MBNM4NM6NM7N  
M0N “DISABLED” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ENABLED”: The unit will hold the previous setting.  
Holding the previous zoom  
setting  
MBNM4NM6NM8N  
M0N “DISABLED” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ENABLED”: The unit will hold the previous setting.  
Holding the previous collate  
setting  
MBNM4NM6NM9N  
M0N “DISABLED” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ENABLED”: The unit will hold the previous setting.  
Holding the previous edge  
setting  
MBNM4NM7NM3N  
M0N “DISABLED” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ENABLED”: The unit will hold the previous setting.  
Setting the frame margin  
M0N “DISABLED” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
MBNM4NM7NM4N  
M1N “ENABLED”: Your copies will be automatically reduced according to the  
margin setting. However, if you change the zoom rate (page 43), your copies  
will not be automatically reduced.  
Holding the previous margin  
setting  
MBNM4NM7NM5N  
M0N “DISABLED” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ENABLED”: The unit will hold the previous setting.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                 
11. Programmable Features  
11.1.5 PC print features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Changing the data timeout  
setting  
The unit will automatically print the remaining data in memory when the  
computer does not send data to the unit during the set time.  
MBNM7NM7NM4N  
1. MMenuN A MBNM7NM7NM4N A MSetN  
2. Enter the desired data timeout setting from “005” seconds to “600”  
seconds, using the dial keypad.  
R The default setting is “060” seconds.  
3. MSetN A MMenuN  
Setting mutual A4/letter print  
MBNM7NM7NM6N  
This feature allows printing in A4-size even if letter-size recording paper is  
loaded in the paper input tray, and vice versa.  
M0N “OFF”: Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ON” (default): Printing is possible between A4/letter-size.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11. Programmable Features  
11.1.6 Scan features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Setting the scan mode for  
Push Scan  
M1N “VIEWER” (default): The scanned image will be displayed in the  
[Multi-Function Viewer] window.  
MBNM4NM9NM3N  
M2N “FILE”: The scanned image will be saved as a file.  
M3N “EMAIL”: The scanned image will be saved for email attachment.  
M4N “OCR”: The scanned image will be displayed in the OCR window.  
M5N “EMAIL ADDRESS”: The scanned image will be sent as an attachment  
without using email software.  
M6N “FTP SERVER”: The scanned image will be sent to the pre-programmed  
folder on the FTP server.  
M7N “SMB FOLDER”: The scanned image will be sent to the pre-programmed  
SMB folder.  
Note:  
R Following selections will be displayed only when the server setting is  
programmed through the web browser interface in advance.  
–
–
–
“EMAIL ADDRESS” will be displayed when the email server setting is  
programmed (page 97).  
“FTP SERVER” will be displayed when the FTP server setting is  
programmed (page 92).  
“SMB FOLDER” will be displayed when the SMB folder setting is  
programmed (page 93).  
Holding the previous  
scanning parameter for Push  
Scan  
M0N “DISABLED” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ENABLED”: The unit will hold the previous scan settings for each mode of  
push scan.  
MBNM4NM9NM4N  
Setting the information for  
When you send scanned files to an FTP server, you can register the FTP  
scan to FTP (LAN connection destinations (up to 6 destinations) to the unit through the web browser interface.  
only)  
1. Start Multi-Function Station.  
R This feature can be  
2. [Utilities] A [Configuration Web Page] A [Device Configuration]  
programmed only through  
the web browser interface.  
3. Type “root” as the user name, then enter the password (feature #155 on  
page 79). A [OK]  
4. Select the [SCAN FEATURE] tab.  
5. Click [Edit] next to [FTP SERVER].  
6. Click [Edit] next to the desired FTP server.  
7. Enter the server name, IP address, folder directory, etc. A [Submit]  
8. Close the web browser.  
Note:  
R If you do not enter a folder directory in step 7, the scanned image will be  
saved in the root folder.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
11. Programmable Features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Setting the information for  
scan to SMB folder (LAN  
connection only)  
When you send scanned files to an SMB folder, you can register the SMB folder  
destinations (up to 6 destinations) to the unit through the web browser interface.  
1. Start Multi-Function Station.  
R This feature can be  
programmed only through  
the web browser interface.  
2. [Utilities] A [Configuration Web Page] A [Device Configuration]  
3. Type “root” as the user name, then enter the password (feature #155 on  
page 79). A [OK]  
4. Select the [SCAN FEATURE] tab.  
5. Click [Edit] next to [SMB FOLDER].  
6. Click [Edit] next to the desired SMB folder.  
7. Enter the folder name and account information.  
8. Click [Browse], and select a desired computer and/or folder directory from  
the list. A [OK]  
R You can also enter the folder directory manually.  
9. [Submit]  
10. Close the web browser.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11. Programmable Features  
11.1.7 LAN features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
LAN setting with a DHCP  
server  
MBNM5NM0NM0N  
M0N “DISABLED”: Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ENABLED” (default): The following will be allocated automatically using a  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server.  
–
IP address  
–
–
Subnet mask  
Default gateway  
Setting the IP address for the This feature is available when feature #500 is deactivated.  
LAN connection  
MBNM5NM0NM1N  
1. MMenuN A MBNM5NM0NM1N A MSetN  
2. Enter the IP address of the unit on the LAN using the dial keypad. A  
MSetN A MMenuN  
Setting the Subnet mask for  
the LAN connection  
MBNM5NM0NM2N  
This feature is available when feature #500 is deactivated.  
1. MMenuN A MBNM5NM0NM2N A MSetN  
2. Enter the subnet mask of the network on the LAN using the dial keypad.  
A MSetN A MMenuN  
Setting the default gateway  
for the LAN connection  
MBNM5NM0NM3N  
This feature is available when feature #500 is deactivated.  
1. MMenuN A MBNM5NM0NM3N A MSetN  
2. Enter the default gateway of the network on the LAN using the dial keypad.  
A MSetN A MMenuN  
Setting the primary DNS  
server for the LAN  
connection  
This feature is available when feature #500 is deactivated.  
1. MMenuN A MBNM5NM0NM4N A MSetN  
2. Enter the primary DNS server of the network on the LAN using the dial  
MBNM5NM0NM4N  
keypad. A MSetN A MMenuN  
Setting the secondary DNS  
server for the LAN  
connection  
This feature is available when feature #500 is deactivated.  
1. MMenuN A MBNM5NM0NM5N A MSetN  
2. Enter the secondary DNS server of the network on the LAN using the dial  
MBNM5NM0NM5N  
keypad. A MSetN A MMenuN  
Setting the machine name  
1. MMenuN A MBNM5NM0NM7N A MSetN  
MBNM5NM0NM7N  
2. Enter the name of the unit to recognize on the LAN, up to 15 characters,  
using the English alphabet and numbers (see page 106 for character entry).  
R The following symbols can also be entered using M0N or M1N.  
! @ # $ % ^ & ’ ) ( . – _ { }  
3. MSetN A MMenuN  
Note:  
R In order to recognize the unit on the LAN, the default name of the unit is  
assigned automatically. If you change the name, assign a unique name to  
avoid overlapping.  
Displaying the MAC address  
of the unit  
MBNM5NM0NM8N  
1. MMenuN A MBNM5NM0NM8N A MSetN  
2. The MAC address of the unit will be displayed. A MMenuN  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
11. Programmable Features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Approving users for the LAN  
connection  
MBNM5NM3NM2N  
M0N “DISABLED” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ENABLED”: The unit will deny/approve access from the pre-programmed  
IP patterns. You can program whether to deny or approve IP addresses. Up to  
4 patterns each for IPv4 and IPv6 can be programmed through the web browser  
interface.  
1. Start Multi-Function Station.  
2. [Utilities] A [Configuration Web Page] A [Network Configuration]  
3. Type “root” as the user name, then enter the password (feature #155 on  
page 79). A [OK]  
4. Select the [LAN FEATURE] tab.  
5. Click [Edit] next to [APPROVED USERS].  
6. Click [Edit] next to [FILTER (IPv4)]/[FILTER (IPv6)].  
7. Change the mode and edit IP filtering information. A [Submit]  
8. Close the web browser.  
Setting the IP address  
automatically for the LAN  
connection  
This feature will be displayed only when feature #500 is activated.  
M0N “DISABLED” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
M1N “ENABLED”: IP address will be allocated automatically without using a  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server.  
MBNM5NM3NM3N  
Setting HTTPD for the LAN  
connection  
MBNM5NM3NM4N  
M0N “DISABLED”: Denies access to the web browser.  
M1N “ENABLED” (default): Allows access to the web browser.  
IPv6 protocol  
M0N “DISABLED” (default): Deactivates this feature.  
MBNM5NM3NM5N  
M1N “ENABLED”: IPv6 protocol can be used. After installing the printer driver,  
be sure to change the port to IPv6 protocol. You can check the IPv6 protocol  
address by printing the “SETUP LIST” (page 137).  
Note:  
R To activate this feature, you need to turn the power switch of the base unit  
OFF, then ON.  
Setting the primary WINS  
server for the LAN  
connection  
This feature is available when feature #500 is deactivated.  
1. MMenuN A MBNM5NM3NM8N A MSetN  
2. Enter the primary WINS server of the network on the LAN using the dial  
MBNM5NM3NM8N  
keypad. A MSetN A MMenuN  
Setting the secondary WINS  
server for the LAN  
connection  
This feature is available when feature #500 is deactivated.  
1. MMenuN A MBNM5NM3NM9N A MSetN  
2. Enter the secondary WINS server of the network on the LAN using the dial  
MBNM5NM3NM9N  
keypad. A MSetN A MMenuN  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
11. Programmable Features  
Feature/Code  
Selection  
Erasing all email addresses,  
FTP destinations, and SMB  
folder destinations stored in  
the unit  
M0N “NO” (default)  
M1N “YES”  
R Disconnect the telephone line cord, USB cable and LAN cable before  
activating this feature.  
MBNM5NM7NM8N  
To erase all email addresses:  
1. MMenuN A MBNM5NM7NM8N  
2. Press M1N to select “YES”. A MSetN  
3. Press M1N to select “YES”. A MSetN A MMenuN  
To erase FTP destinations:  
1. MMenuN A MBNM5NM7NM8N  
2. Press M1N to select “YES”. A MSetN  
3. Press M0N to select “NO”. A MSetN  
4. Press M1N to select “YES”. A MSetN A MMenuN  
To erase SMB folder destinations:  
1. MMenuN A MBNM5NM7NM8N  
2. Press M1N to select “YES”. A MSetN  
3. Press M0N to select “NO”. A MSetN  
4. Press M0N to select “NO”. A MSetN  
5. Press M1N to select “YES”. A MSetN A MMenuN  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11. Programmable Features  
11.1.8 Network features (LAN connection only)  
These features can be programmed through the web browser interface.  
Feature  
Tab  
Selection  
Setting the LAN features [LAN FEATURE]  
Enter the LAN feature settings. See page 94 for details.  
Setting the community  
name for SNMP  
[SNMP]  
[SNMP]  
Enter the SNMP community name. Consult your service  
provider or network administrator for details.  
Setting the location  
Enter the location information of the unit.  
where you use this unit  
Displaying the link local [IPv6]  
address for IPv6  
The link local address will be displayed.  
Displaying the IPv6  
address for auto  
configuration  
[IPv6]  
The IP address for auto configuration will be displayed.  
Setting the IP address  
for IPv6  
[IPv6]  
Enter the IP address for IPv6. Consult your service  
provider or network administrator for details.  
Setting the default  
router for IPv6  
[IPv6]  
Enter the default router address for IPv6. Consult your  
service provider or network administrator for details.  
Setting the information  
for scan to FTP  
[FTP FEATURE]  
Enter the FTP server information to send scanned  
images from the unit to an FTP server. See page 92 for  
details.  
Setting the information  
for scan to SMB  
[SMB FEATURE]  
Enter the SMB folder information to send scanned  
images from the unit to an SMB folder. See page 93 for  
details.  
Setting the information  
for scan to email  
address, voice to email  
address, fax to email  
address and TAM to  
email address  
[EMAIL FEATURE]  
Enter the email server information to send scanned  
image, fax message and/or voice message from the unit  
via an email.  
1. Start Multi-Function Station.  
2. [Utilities] A [Configuration Web Page] A  
[Network Configuration]  
3. Type “root” as the user name, then enter the  
password (feature #155 on page 79). A [OK]  
4. Select the [EMAIL FEATURE] tab.  
5. Click [Edit] next to [EMAIL SERVER].  
6. Enter email address (from), email server  
information, and time zone.  
7. [Submit]  
8. Close the web browser.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11. Programmable Features  
Feature  
Tab  
Selection  
Registering the email  
address destinations  
[EMAIL FEATURE]  
Register email destinations (up to 30 destinations).  
These addresses can be used as destinations for the  
following features.  
–
–
–
–
Scan to email address (page 38)  
TAM to email address (page 63)  
Fax to email address (page 63, 64)  
Voice to email address (page 71)  
1. Start Multi-Function Station.  
2. [Utilities] A [Configuration Web Page] A  
[Network Configuration]  
3. Type “root” as the user name, then enter the  
password (feature #155 on page 79). A [OK]  
4. Select the [EMAIL FEATURE] tab.  
5. Click [Edit] next to [ADDRESS BOOK].  
6. Click [Edit] next to the desired item you want to  
register.  
7. Enter the name and email address.  
R Select the station key number from the drop  
down list if necessary.  
8. [Submit]  
9. Close the web browser.  
Setting the error notify  
feature  
[ERROR NOTIFY]  
[ENABLED]: The unit will send an email to registered  
destinations when a problem occurs.  
[DISABLED] (default): Deactivates this feature.  
Setting the email server [ERROR NOTIFY]  
information for the error  
Enter email address (from), email server information,  
and time zone to send error notification emails.  
notify feature  
Registering  
destinations for the  
error notify feature  
[ERROR NOTIFY]  
Enter the email address to which error notifications will  
be sent and select the types of problems.  
[LIFE WARNING]: A warning indicating that the toner  
cartridge or drum cartridge needs to be replaced soon.  
[MEDIA PATH ERROR]: An error indicating that there  
is a problem with the paper input tray/manual input tray.  
[LIFE ERROR]: An error indicating that the toner  
cartridge or drum cartridge needs to be replaced.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11. Programmable Features  
11.2 Cordless handset programming (KX-MB2060 optional)  
To access the features, there are 2 methods:  
–
–
scrolling through the display menus (page 99)  
using the direct commands (page 100)  
R Direct command is the main method used in these operating instructions.  
11.2.1 Cordless handset features  
Programming by scrolling through the display menus  
1. MMENUN (soft key A)  
2. Press MCN or MDN to select the desired main menu.  
A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
A
3. Press MCN or MDN to select the desired item in  
sub-menu 1. A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
R In some cases, you may need to select from  
sub-menu 2. A MSELECTN (soft key A)  
MOFFN  
MCNMDN  
4. Press MCN or MDN to select the desired setting. A  
MSAVEN (soft key A)  
R This step may vary depending on the feature  
being programmed.  
R To exit the operation, press MOFFN.  
Top-menu  
Sub-menu 1  
Sub-menu 2  
Feature (default setting)  
“Caller list”  
–
–
page 55  
“Answering  
device”  
“Play new msg.”  
“Play all msg.”  
“Erase all msg.”  
“Greeting”  
–
Play new messages: page 75  
Play all messages: page 75  
Erase all messages: page 75  
–
–
“Record greeting”  
Record greeting message:  
page 74  
“Check greeting”  
Play greeting message: page 74  
“Pre-recorded”  
Reset to pre-recorded greeting  
message: page 74  
*1  
“Settings”  
Change the ring count (“2  
rings”): page 76  
“Ring count”  
“Recording time”  
Change the maximum recording  
time (“3 min”): page 76  
“Remote code”  
Set the remote operating ID  
(“111”): page 76  
“Answer on”  
–
–
–
Turn the answering machine ON:  
page 62  
“Answer off”  
Turn the answering machine OFF:  
page 64  
*2  
–
–
Voice mail access  
“V. M. access”  
“Intercom”  
–
–
Intercom call: page 104  
Date and time: page 28  
*1  
“Set date & time”  
“Date and time”  
“Alarm”  
–
Set the alarm (“Off”): page 103  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
11. Programmable Features  
Top-menu  
Sub-menu 1  
Sub-menu 2  
Feature (default setting)  
*3 *4  
,
“Initial  
setting”  
“Ringer setting”  
Cordless handset ringer volume  
(Maximum): page 27  
“Ringer volume”  
“Ringer  
Ringtones for outside calls (“Tone  
1”)  
*3 *5 *6 *7  
,
,
,
tone”  
*3  
Set the silent mode: page 51  
“Silent mode”  
–
(“Off”)  
–
–
“On/Off”  
“Start/End”  
–
(“11:00 PM/06:00 AM”)  
*1  
“Set date & time”  
Date and time: page 28  
“Date and time”  
“Alarm”  
Set the alarm (“Off”): page 103  
“Handset name”  
“Voice mail”  
–
Change the handset name:  
page 103  
“Store VM access#”  
Store the voice mail access  
number  
“Message alert”  
“Display setting”  
–
Set the message alert (“On”):  
page 76  
*3  
LCD display contrast  
(Level 3)  
“LCD Contrast”  
*3 *8  
,
–
–
Keytones ON/OFF (“On”)  
“Key tone”  
*9  
Auto talk ON/OFF (“Off”):  
page 50  
“Auto talk”  
“Registration”  
“Register handset”  
page 104  
*3  
“Change language”  
Display language (“English”):  
page 103  
“Display”  
Programming using the direct commands  
1. MMENUN (soft key A) A M#N  
2. Enter the desired code.  
3. Select the desired setting. A MSAVEN (soft key  
A
A)  
R This step may vary depending on the feature  
being programmed.  
MOFFN  
R To exit the operation, press MOFFN.  
Note:  
R See page 99 for the default settings.  
Feature  
Code  
Selection  
“Caller list”  
M2NM1NM3N  
See page 55 for details.  
See page 75 for details.  
“Play new msg.”  
M3NM2NM3N  
(msg.: message)  
“Play all msg.”  
“Erase all msg.”  
“Record greeting”  
“Check greeting”  
M3NM2NM4N  
M3NM2NM5N  
M3NM0NM2N  
M3NM0NM3N  
See page 75 for details.  
See page 75 for details.  
See page 74 for details.  
See page 74 for details.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11. Programmable Features  
Feature  
Code  
Selection  
“Pre-recorded”  
(Reset to pre-recorded  
greeting)  
M3NM0NM4N  
See page 74 for details.  
*1  
M2NM1NM1N  
“2 rings”  
“Ring count”  
“3 rings”  
“4 rings”  
“Toll saver”  
See page 76 for details.  
“Recording time”  
M3NM0NM5N  
“1 min”  
“3 min”  
“Greeting only”  
See page 76 for details.  
“Remote code”  
“Answer on”  
M3NM0NM6N  
M3NM2NM7N  
M3NM2NM8N  
M3NM3NM0N  
See page 76 for details.  
See page 62 for details.  
See page 64 for details.  
“Answer off”  
“V. M. access”  
–
*2  
(V.M.: Voice mail)  
“Intercom”  
M2NM7NM4N  
See page 104 for details.  
See page 28 for details.  
*1  
M1NM0NM1N  
“Date and time”  
“Alarm”  
M7NM2NM0N  
M0N “Off”  
M1N “Once”  
M2N “Daily”  
See page 103 for details.  
*3 *4  
,
M1NM6NM0N  
M0N “Off”  
“Ringer volume”  
M1N Level 1  
M2N Level 2  
M3N Level 3  
M4N Level 4  
M5N Level 5  
M6N Level 6  
See page 27 for details.  
“Ringer  
M1NM6NM1N  
M1N “Tone 1”  
M2N “Tone 2”  
M3N “Tone 3”  
M4N “Tone 4”  
M5N “Tone 5”  
M6N “Melody 1”  
M7N “Melody 2”  
M8N “Melody 3”  
M9N “Melody 4”  
M0N “Melody 5”  
*3 *5 *6 *7  
,
,
,
tone”  
“Silent mode”  
M2NM3NM8N  
M0N “Off”  
M1N “On”  
*3  
(On/Off)  
See page 51 for details.  
“Silent mode”  
M2NM3NM7N  
See page 51 for details.  
See page 103 for details.  
*3  
(Start/End)  
“Handset name”  
M1NM0NM4N  
“Store VM access#”  
M3NM3NM1N  
–
(VM: Voice mail)  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11. Programmable Features  
Feature  
Code  
Selection  
“Message alert”  
M3NM4NM0N  
M0N “Off”  
M1N “On”  
See page 76 for details.  
“LCD Contrast”  
M1NM4NM5N  
M1N Level 1  
M2N Level 2  
M3N Level 3  
M4N Level 4  
M5N Level 5  
M6N Level 6  
*3  
(Display contrast)  
*3 *8  
,
M1NM6NM5N  
M0N “Off”  
“Key tone”  
M1N “On”  
*9  
M2NM0NM0N  
M0N “Off”  
“Auto talk”  
M1N “On”  
See page 50 for details.  
“Register handset”  
“Deregistration”  
“Display”  
M1NM3NM0N  
M1NM3NM1N  
M1NM1NM0N  
See page 104 for details.  
See page 104 for details.  
M1N “English”  
M2N “Español”  
*3  
(Change language)  
See page 103 for details.  
*1 When this setting is changed using the cordless handset, the setting for the base unit will also be changed,  
and vice versa.  
*2 The unit lets you know that you have new voice mail messages in the following ways:  
–
“New Voice Mail” is displayed on the cordless handset.  
R The indication of “New Voice Mail” may not display properly depending on availability of this service  
provider. Please contact your telephone service provider for details.  
–
The message indicator on the cordless handset flashes slowly if the message alert feature is turned ON  
(feature #340 on page 76).  
*3 This setting can be changed individually for the base unit and the cordless handset.  
–
–
–
–
–
–
To set the base unit ringer volume, see page 27.  
To set the base unit ringtone for outside calls, see feature #161 on page 79.  
To set the base unit silent mode, see feature #237 and feature #238 on page 50.  
To set the base unit LCD display contrast, see feature #145 on page 78.  
To set the base unit keytone, see feature #165 on page 80.  
To set the base unit language, see feature #110 on page 78.  
*4 When the ringer volume is turned OFF, is displayed and the cordless handset does not ring for outside calls.  
However even when the ringer volume is set to OFF, the cordless handset still rings for alarm (page 103),  
intercom calls, and paging (page 104).  
*5 If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service (such as IDENTA-RING), select a tone (tone 1 to 5). If you select  
a melody, you cannot distinguish lines by their ringers.  
*6 If you select one of the melody ringer tones, the ringer tone continues to play for several seconds even if the  
caller has already hung up. You may either hear a dial tone or no one on the line when you answer the call.  
*7 The preset melodies in this product are used with permission of © 2009 Copyrights Vision Inc.  
*8 Turn this feature OFF if you prefer not to hear key tones while you are dialing or pressing any keys, including  
confirmation tones and error tones.  
*9 If you subscribe to a Caller ID service and want to view the caller’s information after lifting up the cordless  
handset to answer a call, turn OFF this feature.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
11. Programmable Features  
handset name, “Handset 1” to “Handset 6” is  
displayed.  
11.2.2 Cordless handset setup  
1. MMENUN (soft key) A M#NM1NM0NM4N  
Alarm  
2. Enter the desired name, up to 10 characters (see  
page 106 for character entry).  
An alarm sounds at the set time for 3 minutes once or  
daily. Alarm can be set for each cordless handset.  
R If not required, go to step 3.  
Important:  
3. MSAVEN (soft key)  
R Set the date and time beforehand (feature #101 on  
4. Press MCN or MDN repeatedly to display the desired  
page 28).  
setting. A MSELECTN (soft key)  
1. MMENUN (soft key) A M#NM7NM2NM0N  
5. MSELECTN (soft key) A MOFFN  
2. Select the desired alarm option. A MSELECTN (soft  
key)  
“Off”  
Turns alarm OFF. Go to step 6.  
“Once”  
An alarm sounds once at the set time.  
“Daily”  
An alarm sounds daily at the set time. Go to step  
4.  
3. Enter the desired month and date. A MOKN (soft  
key)  
4. Set the desired time.  
R Press MAM/PMN (soft key) repeatedly to select  
“AM” or “PM”. A MOKN (soft key)  
R If you select Spanish for the language (feature  
#110 on page 103), the time is set using a 24  
hour clock.  
5. Select the desired alarm tone. A MSELECTN (soft  
key)  
R We recommend selecting a different ringer tone  
from the one used for outside calls.  
6. MSELECTN (soft key) A MOFFN  
R When the alarm is set, is displayed.  
Note:  
R To stop the alarm, press any dial key or place the  
cordless handset on the charger.  
R When the cordless handset is in use, the alarm will  
not sound until the cordless handset is in standby  
mode.  
Display language  
You can select either “English” or “Español” as the  
display language. The default setting is “English”.  
1. MMENUN (soft key) A M#NM1NM1NM0N  
2. Select your desired language.  
3. MSAVEN (soft key) A MOFFN  
Changing the cordless handset name  
Each cordless handset can be given a customized name  
(“Bob”, “Kitchen”, etc.). This is useful when you make  
intercom calls between cordless handsets. You can also  
select whether or not the cordless handset name is  
displayed in standby mode. The default setting is  
“Off”. If you select “On” without entering any cordless  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
12. Multi-unit Operation (KX-MB2060 optional)  
3 “Yes” A MSELECTN (soft key)  
12.1 Operating additional units  
4
MOFFN  
12. . Multi-unit Operation (KX-MB2060 optional)  
12.1.1 Additional cordless handsets  
Up to 6 cordless handsets can be registered to a single  
base unit. Additional cordless handsets will give you the  
freedom to, for example, have an intercom call with  
another cordless handset while a third cordless handset  
is on an outside call.  
12.3 Intercom  
Intercom calls can be made between a cordless handset  
and the base unit, and between 2 cordless handsets. You  
can page all cordless handsets at once from the base  
unit.  
Important:  
Note:  
R The additional cordless handset model  
recommended for use with this unit is noted on  
page 7.  
R If you receive an outside call while talking on the  
intercom, you hear 2 tones. To answer the call, hang  
up the intercom, then answer the outside call.  
–
see step 3 on “6.1.1 With the base unit”,  
page 49.  
12.2 Registering a cordless  
handset to a base unit  
The supplied cordless handset and base unit are  
pre-registered. If for some reason the cordless handset  
is not registered to the base unit, re-register the cordless  
handset.  
–
see step 3 on “6.1.2 With the cordless handset  
(KX-MB2060 optional)”, page 49.  
MFlashN / MFLASHN cannot be used to answer  
outside calls.  
R When paging the cordless handset, the paged  
cordless handset beeps for 1 minute.  
After purchasing an additional cordless handset, register  
it to the base unit. Ensure that the additional cordless  
handset is turned ON. Make sure that the batteries are  
installed correctly (page 19).  
12.3.1 Making intercom calls  
With the cordless handset  
1. MMENUN (soft key) A MINTN (soft key)  
1
MMENUN (soft key) A M#NM1NM3NM0N  
2. To page the base unit, press M0N.  
2 Press and hold MLocatorN on the base unit for about  
5 seconds, until the registration tone sounds.  
R If all registered cordless handsets start ringing,  
press the same button to stop. Then repeat this  
step.  
To page another cordless handset, press MCN or  
MDN repeatedly to select the desired cordless  
handset. A MSELECTN (soft key)  
R The base unit or the destination cordless handset  
will beep (be paged) for 1 minute.  
R After pressing MLocatorN, the rest of this  
R To stop paging, press MOFFN.  
procedure must be completed within 90 seconds.  
3. When the paged party answers, talk into the cordless  
3 Press MOKN (soft key), then wait until a long beep  
handset.  
sounds.  
4. To end the intercom call, press MOFFN.  
Note:  
With the base unit  
R Charge the batteries of your additional cordless  
1. MIntercomN  
handset for about 7 hours before initial use.  
2. To page one cordless handset, press the desired  
cordless handset number.  
R While registering, “In use” is displayed on all  
registered cordless handsets.  
To page all cordless handsets, press M0N.  
R The destination cordless handset(s) will beep (be  
paged) for 1 minute.  
R When you purchase an additional cordless handset,  
refer to the additional cordless handset’s installation  
manual for registration.  
R To stop paging, press MMonitorN or MIntercomN.  
3. When the paged party answers, lift the handset, and  
12.2.1 Deregistering a cordless handset  
talk to the other party.  
A cordless handset can cancel its own registration (or the  
registration of another cordless handset) that is stored to  
the base unit. This allows the cordless handset to end its  
wireless connection with the system.  
4. To end the intercom call, replace the handset.  
Cordless handset locator  
You can locate a misplaced cordless handset by  
pressing MLocatorNM0N on the base unit.  
R All registered cordless handsets beep for 1 minute.  
1
MMENUN (soft key) A M#NM1NM3NM1N  
R All cordless handsets registered to the base unit  
are displayed.  
To stop paging, press MLocatorN again.  
2 Select the cordless handset you want to cancel.  
A MSELECTN (soft key)  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
12. Multi-unit Operation (KX-MB2060 optional)  
2 Base unit:  
12.3.2 Answering intercom calls  
To page one cordless handset, press the desired  
cordless handset number.  
With the cordless handset  
When the cordless handset is being paged, it will beep  
(be paged) and the ringer indicator will flash rapidly. The  
display will show the paging extension’s number.  
To page all cordless handsets, press M0N.  
3 Cordless handset:  
Press M N or M N to answer the page.  
1. Press M N or M N to answer the page.  
4 Base unit:  
2. To end the intercom call, press MOFFN.  
To complete the transfer, replace the handset.  
To establish a conference call, press M3N.  
With the base unit  
When the base unit is being paged, it will beep and  
display the paging extension’s number.  
1. Lift the handset to answer the page.  
2. To end the intercom call, replace the handset.  
12.4 Transferring a call/  
conference  
Outside calls can be transferred or a conference call with  
an outside party can be made between a cordless  
handset and the base unit, and between 2 cordless  
handsets using the intercom feature.  
12.4.1 To the base unit or another cordless  
handset (using the cordless handset)  
1 Cordless handset:  
During an outside call, press MINTN (soft key) to put  
the call on hold.  
2 Cordless handset:  
To page the base unit, press M0N.  
To page another cordless handset, press MCN or  
MDN repeatedly to select the desired cordless  
handset. A MSELECTN (soft key)  
3 Base unit:  
Lift the handset to answer the page.  
Another cordless handset:  
Press M N or M N to answer the page.  
4 Cordless handset:  
To complete the transfer, press MOFFN.  
To establish a conference call, press MCONFN (soft  
key).  
R To leave the conference, press MOFFN. The other  
2 parties can continue the conversation.  
R To put the outside call on hold, press MMENUN  
(soft key) A “Hold” A MSELECTN (soft key).  
To resume the conference, press MCONFN (soft  
key).  
12.4.2 To a cordless handset (using the base  
unit)  
1 Base unit:  
During a telephone call, press MIntercomN.  
R The call will be put on hold.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
13. Useful Information  
13.1 Character entry  
The dial keys are used to enter characters and numbers. Each dial key has multiple characters assigned to it.  
13. . Useful Information  
–
–
–
Press MFN or MEN to move the cursor left or right.  
Press dial keys to enter characters and numbers.  
Press MStopN on the base unit, or MCLEARN (soft key) on the cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional) to erase  
the character or number highlighted by the cursor. Press and hold MStopN/MCLEARN (soft key) to erase all  
characters or numbers.  
–
–
Press MGN to switch between uppercase and lowercase.  
To enter another character located on the same dial key, press MEN to move the cursor to the next space, then  
press the appropriate dial key.  
–
–
If you do not press any dial key of the cordless handset within 5 seconds after entering a character, the character  
is fixed and the cursor moves to the next space (KX-MB2060 optional).  
When using the base unit, you cannot enter a space by pressing M1N.  
To enter a space, press M0N.  
To insert a space, press MZoomN.  
Character table for the following functions:  
–
–
–
–
Web fax preview access code (feature #450 on page 66)  
Web voice playback access code (feature #368 on page 73)  
Machine name (feature #507 on page 94)  
Entering email address (page 38, 71)  
R You can also enter a hyphen by pressing MFlashN.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
13. Useful Information  
R When another person is adjusting stored data in the  
base unit, it may be overwritten. Make sure the base  
unit is not currently being used for the same function.  
13.2 Status of the base unit  
R Some characters that have been entered on the unit  
(page 106) may not be displayed correctly due to the  
language setting of your computer.  
13.2.1 Using Remote Control  
You can easily operate the following functions from your  
computer.  
13.2.2 Using Device Monitor  
–
–
Programming the features (page 78)  
Storing, editing or erasing items in the base unit’s  
phonebook (page 51)  
Storing or erasing items for broadcast transmission  
(page 59)  
You can confirm the setting information and current  
status of the base unit from your computer.  
–
1 Start Multi-Function Station.  
–
–
–
–
Viewing items in the journal report (page 57)  
Saving the journal report on your computer  
Viewing items in the Caller ID list (page 54)  
Storing caller information into the base unit’s  
phonebook (page 56)  
2 [Utilities] A [Device Monitor]  
R The [Device Monitor] window will appear.  
3 Confirm the status of the base unit.  
[Status]: Current status of the base unit  
Note:  
–
Saving the Caller ID list on your computer  
R Additional information (toner and recording paper  
status, base unit information, etc.) will be displayed  
in [Status] tab by clicking [Advanced Information].  
1 Start Multi-Function Station. A [Remote Control]  
R The [Multi-Function Remote Control] window  
will appear.  
R You can update the status of the base unit by clicking  
[Refresh].  
R If a printing error occurs, the Device Monitor will start  
automatically and display the error information.  
R For details, see the help file by selecting [ ] from  
Multi-Function Station.  
13.2.3 Using the web browser (LAN  
connection only)  
You can confirm the setting information and status of the  
base unit from the web browser.  
1 Start Multi-Function Station. A [Utilities] A  
[Configuration Web Page]  
R You can also access the unit by entering its IP  
address in a web browser.  
2 Select a category from the menu bar.  
[Status]: Toner and paper information, etc.  
[Device]: Current status of the base unit, etc.  
[Network]: Network information, etc.  
2 Select the desired tab.  
R The latest data in the base unit will be displayed.  
3 Perform the desired operation.  
R For details about each function, click [Help].  
R When you select [Device] or [Network], you can  
change which features are displayed by clicking  
the feature tabs at the top of the right frame.  
R To stop the operation, click [Cancel].  
4 [OK]  
R You can also click [Apply] to continue the next  
operation without closing the window.  
3 Confirm the status of the base unit.  
Note:  
5 Enter the password (feature #155 on page 79). A  
[OK]  
R You can update the status of the base unit by clicking  
[Reload].  
R The new data will be transferred to the base unit  
and the window will close.  
Note:  
R Some of the features cannot be programmed from  
your computer.  
R For details, see the help file by selecting [ ] from  
Multi-Function Station.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
13. Useful Information  
13.3 Canceling the operations  
You can cancel the current operation from the base unit.  
You can also select the desired operation to cancel.  
1
MStopN  
R “USER STOPPED” is displayed.  
R If “USER STOPPED” is not displayed, go to step  
2.  
2 To cancel printing:  
Press MStopN repeatedly to display “STOP  
PRINTING?”.  
To cancel scanning:  
Press MStopN repeatedly to display “STOP  
SCANNING?”.  
To cancel copying:  
Press MStopN repeatedly to display “STOP  
COPYING?”.  
To cancel sending or receiving faxes:  
Press MStopN repeatedly to display “STOP FAX?”.  
To cancel broadcast transmission:  
Press MStopN repeatedly to display “BROAD  
CANCELED?”.  
To cancel fax redialing:  
Press MStopN repeatedly to display “SEND  
CANCELED?”.  
3
MSetN  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
14. Help  
14.1 Report messages  
To indicate the unit’s fax transmission/reception status, one of the following messages will be printed on the  
1
4
.
.
H
e
l
p
confirmation and journal reports (page 57).  
Message  
Code  
Cause & Solution  
COMMUNICATION ERROR  
40-42  
46-72  
FF  
R A transmission or reception error occurred. Try  
again or check with the other party.  
43  
44  
R A line problem occurred. Connect the telephone line  
cord to a different jack and try again.  
R An overseas transmission error occurred. Try using  
the overseas mode (feature #411 on page 83).  
DOCUMENT JAMMED  
-----  
R Remove the jammed document (page 131).  
ERROR-NOT YOUR UNIT  
53  
54  
59  
70  
R A transmission or reception error occurred because  
of a problem with the other party’s fax machine.  
Check with the other party.  
JUNK FAX PROH. REJECT  
MEMORY FULL  
-----  
R The junk fax prohibitor feature of this unit rejected  
fax reception.  
-----  
R The memory is full of received documents due to a  
lack of recording paper or a recording paper jam.  
Load paper (page 16) or remove the jammed paper  
(page 126).  
R If the PC fax setting (feature #442 on page 86) is set  
to “ALWAYS”, check the connection between the  
computer and the unit.  
R If the fax preview mode (feature #448 on page 66)  
is set to “ON”, use the web browser on the computer  
connected via the LAN to view, print or save the  
documents, and then erase unnecessary  
documents (page 66).  
NO DOCUMENT / FAILED PICKUP  
OTHER FAX NOT RESPONDING  
-----  
-----  
R The document was not fed into the unit properly.  
Re-insert it and try again.  
R The other party’s fax machine is busy or has run out  
of recording paper. Try again.  
R The other party’s fax machine rings too many times.  
Send the fax manually (page 57).  
R The other party’s machine is not a fax machine.  
Check with the other party.  
R The number you dialed is not in service.  
PRESSED THE ‘Stop’ KEY  
-----  
R
MStopN was pressed and fax communication was  
canceled.  
THE COVER WAS OPENED  
OK  
-----  
-----  
R The top cover was opened. Close it and try again.  
R Fax transmission or reception was successful.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
   
14. Help  
14.2 Display messages  
To indicate the unit’s status, one or more of the following messages will appear on the display.  
14.2.1 Base unit  
Display  
Cause & Solution  
“CALL SERVICE”  
R There is something wrong with the unit. Contact our service personnel.  
“CORDLESS IN USE”  
R The cordless handset you tried to call is in use.  
“BUSY”  
R The cordless handset you are calling is too far from the base unit.  
“CHANGE DRUM”  
R There is something wrong with the drum cartridge. Replace the drum  
cartridge and the toner cartridge.  
“CHECK DOCUMENT”  
R The document was not fed into the unit properly. Remove the document,  
and then press MStopN to clear the message. Re-insert the document. If  
misfeeding occurs frequently, clean the document feeder rollers  
(page 136) and try again.  
“CHECK DRUM”  
R The drum cartridge is not inserted properly. Re-insert it correctly (page 12).  
“CHECK PAPER #1”  
R Recording paper is not installed or the paper input tray has run out of paper.  
Install paper (page 16).  
R Recording paper was not fed into the unit properly. Re-insert the recording  
paper (page 130).  
R The paper input tray is not installed or is not inserted completely. Insert the  
paper input tray into the base unit.  
“CHECK PAPER TRAY #1”  
R The loaded recording paper is not the appropriate size. Load recording  
paper of the size that is shown on the display.  
R If this message is often displayed, also change the recording paper size  
setting (feature #380 on page 80).  
R The recording paper size setting (feature #380 on page 80) is set to  
“B5(ISO)”, “B5(JIS)” or “16K”, so received faxes have been stored into  
memory. Change the recording paper size setting and load the appropriate  
recording paper.  
Note:  
R “#1”: Check the paper input tray. The displayed paper size depends on the  
recording paper size setting (feature #380 on page 80).  
R “#2”: Check the manual input tray. The displayed paper size depends on  
the recording paper size setting (feature #381 on page 81).  
“CHECK PICK UP INPUT  
R Recording paper was not fed into the unit properly. Load the paper again  
(page 130).  
TRAY #2”  
“CHECK REAR COVER”  
R The manual input tray (rear cover) is open. Close it.  
R A recording paper jam occurred near the manual input tray (rear cover).  
Remove the jammed paper (page 126).  
“COOL DOWN FUSER”  
R The unit is cooling down the fuser unit. Wait for a while.  
“DRUM LIFE LOW REPLACE  
R The drum is reaching the end of its life. Replace the drum cartridge and the  
toner cartridge as soon as possible.  
SOON”  
“EMAIL SIZE OVER”  
R When performing scan to email address, the total file size of scanned data  
exceeded the file size limitation. Divide the document into sections.  
R When performing voice to email address, the total size of audio data exceed  
the file size limitation. Transfer the voice message on your computer first  
(page 71), divide it into sections, then send it to the desired destination using  
your email software.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110  
   
14. Help  
Display  
Cause & Solution  
“FAX IN MEMORY”  
R The unit has a document in memory. See the other displayed message  
instructions to print out the document. For fax memory capacity, see  
page 138.  
R If the PC fax setting (feature #442 on page 86) is set to “ALWAYS”,  
–
–
check the connection between the computer and the unit.  
check that the computer is turned ON.  
R If the fax preview mode (feature #448 on page 66) is set to “ON”,  
–
view, print or save the received fax documents using the web browser  
on the computer connected via the LAN, and then erase the  
unnecessary documents (page 66).  
–
turn the setting to “OFF”. The fax documents stored in memory will be  
printed automatically.  
“FILE SIZE OVER”  
R When performing scan to FTP server or scan to SMB folder, the total file  
size of scanned data exceeded the file size limitation. Divide the document  
into sections.  
“KEEP COPYING”  
R Copying has stopped due to some existing problem (Example: a lack of  
recording paper or a recording paper jam). See the other displayed message  
instructions to continue copying.  
“LOW TEMP.”  
R The inside of the unit is extremely cold and cannot be operated. Use the unit  
in a warmer area.  
“MEMORY FULL”  
R When performing memory transmission, the document being stored  
exceeded the memory capacity of the unit. Send the entire document  
manually.  
R When making a copy, the document being stored exceeded the memory  
capacity of the unit. Press MStopN to clear the message. Divide the  
document into sections.  
R There is no space to store new items in the phonebook. Erase unnecessary  
items (page 52).  
“MESSAGE FULL”  
“MODEM ERROR”  
“NO FAX REPLY”  
R There is no room left in memory to record voice messages. Erase  
unnecessary messages (page 70, 75).  
R There is something wrong with the unit’s modem. Contact our service  
personnel.  
R The other party’s fax machine is busy or has run out of recording paper. Try  
again.  
“OUT OF PAPER INPUT TRAY R Recording paper is not loaded in the manual input tray. Load paper  
(page 18).  
#2”  
“PAPER IN TRAY #2”  
R The recording paper is installed in the manual input tray (page 18).  
R A recording paper jam occurred. Remove the jammed paper (page 126).  
“PAPER JAMMED”  
“OPEN TOP COVER”  
“PC FAIL OR BUSY”  
R The cable or the computer power cord is not connected correctly. Check the  
connections (page 21, 32).  
R The software is not running on the computer. Restart the software and try  
again.  
“PLEASE WAIT”  
R The unit is warming up. Wait for a while.  
“RECORDING ERROR”  
R The greeting message you recorded was under 1 second long. Record a  
longer message.  
“REDIAL TIME OUT”  
R The other party’s fax machine is busy or has run out of recording paper. Try  
again.  
“REMOVE DOCUMENT”  
R The document is jammed. Remove the jammed document (page 131).  
5
R Attempted to send or copy a document longer than 600 mm (23 /8") using  
the automatic document feeder. Press MStopN to remove the document.  
Divide the document into two or more sheets and try again.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
111  
14. Help  
Display  
Cause & Solution  
“REMOVE PAPER IN INPUT  
TRAY #2”  
R The recording paper is installed in the manual input tray when trying to  
receive faxes or print reports. Remove the recording paper from manual  
input tray.  
“REPLACE DRUM CHANGE  
R The drum cartridge’s service life is finished. Replace the drum cartridge and  
the toner cartridge immediately.  
SUPPLIES”  
“RX MEMORY FULL”  
R The memory is full of received documents due to a lack of recording paper  
or a recording paper jam. Load paper (page 16) or remove the jammed  
paper (page 126).  
R If the PC fax (feature #442 on page 86) is set to “ALWAYS”,  
–
–
check the connection between the computer and the unit.  
check that the computer is turned ON.  
R If the fax preview mode (feature #448 on page 66) is set to “ON”,  
–
view, print or save the received fax documents using the web browser  
on the computer connected via the LAN, and then erase the  
unnecessary documents (page 66).  
–
turn the setting to “OFF”. The fax documents stored in memory will be  
printed automatically.  
“SCANNER POSITION  
ERROR”  
R There is something wrong with the scanner position. Turn the power switch  
OFF, then ON. If the problem cannot be solved, contact our service  
personnel.  
“SERIAL ERROR”  
R There is something wrong with the unit. Contact our service personnel.  
“SUBSCRIBE TO CALLER ID” R You must subscribe to use Caller ID service. Contact your service provider/  
telephone company for service availability. Once you receive caller  
information, this message will not be displayed.  
“TONER EMPTY”  
R The toner is empty. Replace the toner cartridge immediately.  
“CHANGE SUPPLIES”  
“TONER LOW”  
R The toner is reaching the end of its life. You will need to replace the toner  
cartridge soon.  
“CHANGE SUPPLIES”  
“TOP COVER OPEN”  
R The top cover is open. Close it.  
“TRANSMIT ERROR”  
R A transmission error occurred. Try again.  
14.2.2 Cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional)  
Display  
Cause & Solution  
“Base no power”  
R The cordless handset has lost communication with the base unit. Move  
closer to the base unit and try again.  
or  
R Turn the base unit’s power switch OFF to reset the unit. Turn the power  
switch ON and try again.  
“No link. Re-connect  
R The cordless handset’s registration may have been canceled. Re-register  
base AC adaptor.”  
the cordless handset (feature #130 on page 104).  
“Busy”  
R The called unit is in use.  
R Other units are in use and the system is busy. Try again later.  
R The cordless handset you are using is too far from the base unit. Move closer  
and try again.  
“Call phone company for  
R You have not stored the voice mail access number. Store the number  
(page 101).  
your access #”  
“Error!!”  
R Recording was too short. Try again.  
“Invalid”  
R There is no cordless handset registered to the base unit matching the  
cordless handset number you entered.  
R The cordless handset is not registered to the base unit. Register the cordless  
handset (feature #130 on page 104).  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112  
   
14. Help  
Display  
Cause & Solution  
“Requires subscription  
to Caller ID.”  
R You must subscribe to a Caller ID service. Once you receive caller  
information after subscribing to a Caller ID service, this message will not be  
displayed.  
“Use rechargeable  
R A wrong type of battery such as Alkaline or Manganese was inserted. Use  
only the rechargeable Ni-MH battery noted on page 7.  
battery.”  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
14. Help  
14.3 When a function does not work  
If you still have difficulties after following the instructions in this section, reset the unit. Turn the power OFF the base  
unit, and then turn the power ON of the base unit. Remove the batteries from the cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional), and then insert the batteries into the cordless handset again.  
14.3.1 General  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
The unit does not work.  
R Check the connections (page 21, 32).  
R Make sure that the cordless handset’s battery is installed correctly  
(page 19) and fully charge it (page 22) (KX-MB2060 optional).  
The output tray becomes full  
quickly or the recording paper  
does not stack properly on  
the output tray.  
R High humidity may cause the recording paper to curl. Try turning the paper  
over and re-inserting it. If the curl on the paper is heavy, please remove it  
from the output tray. If you still have this problem, contact our service  
personnel.  
From the base unit I cannot  
adjust the volume, display  
items stored in the one-touch  
dial and phonebook, or  
R The unit is set to scan mode or copy mode. Press MFaxN to switch modes.  
If you still have this problem, contact our service personnel.  
display Caller ID information.  
A printing error is displayed  
while using PC FAX and  
Remote Control.  
R The printer driver is used for PC FAX and Remote Control. Transmission  
errors will be displayed as printing errors.  
Multi-Function Station does  
not work properly.  
R If the USB cable is connected to a USB hub, connect the cable directly to  
the USB port on your computer.  
R Make sure you have installed the latest Service Pack available for the  
version of Windows installed on your computer. See the Microsoft web site  
for details.  
R If you have any other multifunction software installed on your computer,  
uninstall it.  
R Check that your computer has enough memory and hard disk space. If your  
computer warns that there is insufficient memory, close other applications.  
If there is not enough space on the hard disk, delete unnecessary files.  
R Uninstall Multi-Function Station once, and re-install it.  
I cannot install or uninstall  
Multi-Function Station.  
R Some of the files needed to install or uninstall Multi-Function Station may  
be corrupted. Use the MfsCleaner utility (found on the supplied CD-ROM)  
to solve the problem.  
1. Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
R The setup program will start automatically.  
2. [Tools] A [Cleanup Tool]  
R The [MfsCleaner] window will appear.  
3. Click [Clean], and then click [Yes] to restart the computer.  
Note:  
R To install Multi-Function Station again, see page 31.  
I cannot view the operating  
instructions using  
R Install the operating instructions on your computer beforehand (page 32).  
Multi-Function Station.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114  
 
14. Help  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
I cannot find the unit in the  
[Target Device] or [Device  
Select] dialog box when  
operating the following  
functions.  
R The printer driver has not been installed. Install it on your computer  
(page 31).  
–
–
–
–
Scanning  
Remote Control  
PC FAX  
Device Monitor  
I forgot the password for  
feature programming via  
remote operation.  
R You may have changed the feature programming password. If you do not  
remember it, assign a new password using feature #155 (page 79). When  
required to enter the current password, enter “0101” instead.  
During programming, I  
cannot enter the code or ID  
number.  
R All or part of the number is the same as another code or ID. Change the  
number:  
–
–
remote operation ID (code): feature #306 on page 76, 88.  
fax activation code: feature #434 on page 85.  
Email related functions do not R For environments where Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption is required  
work properly.  
to send and receive email, additional email server configuration and/or the  
use of another email system may be required.  
14.3.2 Printing problems  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
Recording paper is wrinkled  
or folded when printed.  
R Make sure that the recording paper is loaded properly (page 16).  
R Try turning the recording paper over or rotating it 180 degrees.  
The printing quality is poor  
(e.g. has smudges, blurred  
points or lines).  
R Some paper has instructions recommending which side to print on. Try  
turning the recording paper over.  
R You may have used paper with a cotton and/or fiber content that is over  
20 %, such as letterhead or resume paper.  
R The recording paper is too damp. Use new paper.  
ABC  
I changed the recording  
paper, but the printing quality  
is still poor.  
R The glass or rollers are dirty with correction fluid, etc. Clean them  
(page 133, 136). Please do not insert a document before correction fluid  
has dried completely.  
R The toner save mode of feature #482 is ON (page 82).  
R The remaining toner is low. Replace the toner cartridge.  
R To check the drum life and quality, please print the printer test list  
(page 137). If printing quality is still poor, replace the toner cartridge and  
drum cartridge.  
A blank sheet is ejected.  
R You placed the document facing the wrong way when using the copier.  
R The other party placed the document in their fax machine the wrong way.  
Check with the other party.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
115  
   
14. Help  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
Colored and gray objects are R Select [Color] or remove the check next to [Grayscale] in the print dialog  
printed in black instead of  
grayscale when printing from  
Microsoft PowerPoint or  
other applications.  
so that colored or gray objects will be printed in grayscale properly.  
When using the unit as a  
printer, the printing result is  
distorted.  
R Your unit is connected to the computer by USB. After canceling printing  
using your computer, you must wait for 60 seconds before re-printing to  
avoid distorted printing.  
14.3.3 Scanner  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
I cannot scan.  
R When scanning at a high resolution, a large amount of available memory is  
required. If your computer warns that there is insufficient memory, close  
other applications and try again.  
R The unit is in use. Try again later.  
R There is not enough space on the hard disk. Delete unnecessary files and  
try again.  
R Check the connection between the computer and the unit (page 21, 32).  
R Restart the computer, and try again.  
R You attempted to scan a document longer than the paper size which you  
set. Change the setting or divide the document into the appropriate paper  
size, and try again.  
The document is not fed into  
the unit when using the unit  
as a scanner.  
R Remove the document in the automatic document feeder and re-insert it.  
Even after clicking [Cancel],  
scanning continues.  
R Please wait. It may take a while for the cancel request to be accepted.  
The name of the desired  
R The printer driver has not been installed. Install it on your computer  
computer is not displayed on  
the base unit when scanning  
documents from the base unit  
(LAN connection only).  
(page 31).  
R The PC name list up feature has been set to [Off]. Set [PC name list up  
on device] to [On] (page 34).  
R The maximum number of computers on the LAN is connected to the unit (up  
to 30 computers). Set [PC name list up on device] to [Off] on the other  
computers (page 34).  
R The IP address of the unit may have changed. To detect the IP address,  
proceed as follows.  
[Start] A [All Programs] or [Programs] A [Panasonic] A the unit’s  
name A [IP Address Checker]  
R The IP address for the unit will be detected.  
14.3.4 Copier  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
The unit will not make a copy. R You cannot make a copy during programming. Make the copy after  
programming.  
R The document was not fed into the unit properly. Re-insert the document.  
R Recording paper is not loaded or the unit has run out of paper. Load paper  
(page 16).  
Letters on the copied  
R The original document is too dark or too light. Change the contrast  
documents are not clear.  
(page 42) and try again.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116  
14. Help  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
The copied documents are  
too dark and cannot be read.  
R You used a colored paper as a document. Change the contrast (page 42)  
and make a lighter copy of the document, using “TEXT” resolution  
(page 42).  
14.3.5 Fax  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
I cannot send documents.  
R The other party’s fax machine is busy or has run out of recording paper. Try  
again.  
R The other party’s machine is not a fax machine. Check with the other party.  
R The other party’s fax machine failed to answer the fax automatically. Send  
the fax manually (page 57).  
R Set the maximum fax speed to “14.4kbps” (feature #418 on page 84).  
I cannot send a fax overseas. R Use the overseas transmission mode (feature #411 on page 83).  
R Add two pauses at the end of the telephone number or dial manually.  
The other party complains  
that letters on their received  
document are distorted.  
R If your line has special telephone services such as call waiting, the service  
may have been activated during fax transmission. Connect the unit to a line  
that does not have these services.  
R Another telephone on the same line is off the hook. Hang up the extension  
telephone and try again.  
The other party complains  
about the quality of their  
received documents.  
R Try copying the document. If the copied image is clear, there may be  
something wrong with the other party’s machine.  
If the copied image is not clear, too dark, or black and white lines or smudges  
appear, refer to “14.3.2 Printing problems”, page 115.  
R The original document is too dark or too light. Change the contrast  
(page 57) and try again.  
The other party complains  
that received documents are  
too dark and cannot be read.  
R You used a colored paper as a document. Change the contrast (page 42)  
and make a lighter copy of the document, using “TEXT” resolution  
(page 42), and try again.  
I cannot receive documents.  
R You may have subscribed to a voice mail service due to service packs  
offered by your telephone company. Fax and voice message reception may  
not be possible when voice mail is activated so we recommend you to:  
–
contact your telephone company and request to deactivate voice mail  
service, or  
–
subscribe to a Distinctive Ring service (page 68).  
R The PC fax setting (feature #442 on page 86) is activated and the received  
fax documents are automatically transferred to the computer. View the  
received documents using the computer (page 65).  
R The fax preview mode (feature #448 on page 66) is activated and the  
received fax documents are automatically stored in memory. View the  
received documents using the web browser on the computer connected via  
the LAN (page 66).  
R Set the maximum fax speed to “14.4kbps” (feature #418 on page 84).  
R Recording paper is installed in the manual input tray. Remove the recording  
paper from the manual input tray.  
I cannot receive the whole  
document.  
R The fax to email address (feature #452 on page 86) is activated. In this case,  
only faxes up to 3 MB can be received. Deactivate the feature, then ask the  
other party to resend the document.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
117  
14. Help  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
I cannot receive documents  
automatically.  
R The receiving mode is set to TEL mode. Set to TAM/FAX mode (page 62)  
or FAX ONLY mode (page 63).  
R The time taken to answer the call is too long. Decrease the number of rings  
before the unit answers a call (feature #210 on page 80).  
R The greeting message is too long. Record a shorter message (page 69).  
R Make sure that the Distinctive Ring of feature #430 is set properly  
(page 68). If you do not subscribe to the Distinctive Ring service offered by  
your local telephone company, this feature should be OFF.  
The display shows  
“CONNECTING.....”, but  
faxes are not received.  
R The receiving mode is set to FAX ONLY mode and the incoming call is not  
a fax. Change the receiving mode to TAM/FAX mode (page 62) or TEL mode  
(page 64).  
The printing quality of the  
received documents is poor.  
R If documents can be copied properly, the unit is working normally. The other  
party may have sent a faint document or there may be something wrong  
with the other party’s machine. Ask them to send a clearer copy of the  
document or to check their fax machine.  
R If documents can not be copied properly, refer to “14.3.2 Printing  
problems”, page 115.  
The other party complains  
that they cannot send a  
document.  
R The receiving mode is set to TEL mode. Receive the document manually  
(page 64) or change the receiving mode to TAM/FAX mode (page 62) or  
FAX ONLY mode (page 63).  
R The memory is full of received documents due to a lack of recording paper  
or a recording paper jam. Load paper (page 16) or remove the jammed  
paper (page 126).  
R If the PC fax setting (feature #442 on page 86) is set to “ALWAYS”, check  
the connection between the computer and the unit.  
R If the fax preview mode (feature #448 on page 66) is set to “ON”, use the  
web browser on the computer connected via the LAN to view, print or save  
the documents, and then erase unnecessary documents (page 66).  
I cannot select the desired  
receiving mode.  
R If you want to set TAM/FAX or FAX ONLY mode:  
–
select the desired mode using feature #400 (page 81), and press MAuto  
AnswerN repeatedly to turn ON the MAuto AnswerN light.  
R If you want to set TEL mode:  
press MAuto AnswerN repeatedly to turn OFF the MAuto AnswerN light.  
R The Distinctive Ring of feature #430 is activated (page 68).  
When an extension telephone R You must set remote fax activation to ON (feature #434 on page 85)  
–
is connected, I cannot receive  
documents by pressing  
MGNMBNM9N.  
beforehand.  
R Press MGNMBNM9N firmly.  
R You may have changed the remote fax activation code from MGNMBNM9N  
(default setting). Verify the remote fax activation code (feature #434 on  
page 85).  
I cannot hear a dial tone.  
R If you use a splitter/coupler to connect the unit, remove the splitter/coupler  
and connect the unit to the wall jack directly. If the unit operates properly,  
check the splitter/coupler.  
R Disconnect the unit from the telephone line and connect a known working  
telephone. If the working telephone operates properly, contact our service  
personnel to have the unit repaired. If the working telephone does not  
operate properly, contact your telephone company.  
R The power cord or telephone line cord is not connected. Check the  
connections (page 21).  
R If you connected the unit through a computer modem, connect the unit  
directly to a telephone line jack.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118  
14. Help  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
I cannot make calls.  
R The dialing mode setting may be wrong. Change the setting (feature #120  
on page 24).  
R The cordless handset is too far from the base unit. Move closer and try again  
(KX-MB2060 optional).  
R Another unit is in use. Wait and try again later.  
R Answering machine is being used. Wait and try again later.  
The unit does not ring.  
R The ringer volume is turned OFF. Adjust it (page 27).  
The other party complains  
they only hear a fax tone and  
cannot talk.  
R FAX ONLY mode is set (page 63). Tell the other party the number is only  
used for faxes.  
R Change the receiving mode to TEL mode (page 64) or TAM/FAX mode  
(page 62).  
R If you use a Distinctive Ring service, make sure you have set the same ring  
pattern assigned by the telephone company (page 68).  
The MRedialN or MPauseN  
button on the base unit does  
not function properly.  
R If this button is pressed during dialing, a pause will be inserted. If pressed  
immediately after a dial tone is obtained, the last number dialed will be  
redialed.  
The receiving mode does not R Distinctive Ring is set (feature #430 on page 68).  
function properly.  
Whenever I try to retrieve my  
voice mail messages, I am  
interrupted by the fax tone.  
R You are probably entering MGN MBN M9N. This is the default setting for the  
fax activation code. If you use a voice mail service, turn the fax activation  
feature OFF or reprogram the activation code (feature #434 on page 85).  
I cannot page a cordless  
handset or base unit  
(KX-MB2060 optional).  
R The cordless handset is too far from the base unit.  
I cannot receive a fax  
R Make sure the following features are set beforehand.  
document on the computer.  
–
–
PC fax reception (feature #442 on page 86)  
Computer setting for the PC fax reception (feature #443 on page 30)  
I cannot display a received fax R Make sure the following features are set beforehand.  
document on the web  
browser (LAN connection  
only).  
–
–
Fax preview mode (feature #448 on page 66)  
Web fax preview access code (feature #450 on page 66)  
R You cannot display a received fax document on the web browser during  
printing, copying or scanning. Try again after printing, copying or scanning.  
I cannot erase a received fax  
document on the web  
browser (LAN connection  
only).  
R View, print or save a received fax document before erasing (page 66).  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
119  
14. Help  
14.3.6 Caller ID  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
Caller information is not  
displayed.  
R You must subscribe to a Caller ID service. Contact your service provider/  
telephone company for details.  
R If your unit is connected to any additional telephone equipment such as a  
Caller ID box or cordless telephone line jack, plug the unit directly into the  
wall jack.  
R If you use a DSL/ADSL service, we recommend connecting a DSL/ADSL  
filter between the base unit and the telephone line jack. Contact your DSL/  
ADSL provider for details.  
R The name display service may not be available in some areas. Contact your  
service provider/telephone company for details.  
R Other telephone equipment may be interfering with this unit. Disconnect the  
other equipment and try again.  
R Other electrical appliances connected to the same outlet may be interfering  
with the Caller ID information.  
R Telephone line noise may be affecting the Caller ID information.  
R The caller requested not to send his/her information (page 54).  
R If a call is being transferred to you, the caller information will not be  
displayed.  
Time on the unit has shifted.  
R Incorrect time information from incoming Caller ID changes the time. Set the  
time adjustment to “MANUAL” (OFF) (feature #226 on page 80).  
14.3.7 Cordless handset (KX-MB2060 optional)  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
The cordless handset does  
not turn on even after  
R Place the cordless handset on the charger to turn ON the cordless handset.  
installing charged batteries.  
The cordless handset does  
not work.  
R Make sure that the batteries are installed correctly (page 19) and fully charge  
them (page 22).  
R Fully charge the batteries (page 22).  
R Check the connections (page 21).  
R Clean the charge contacts and charge again (page 22).  
R Remove the batteries from the cordless handset, and then insert the  
batteries into the cordless handset again.  
R Check that power cord is connected properly, and power switch of the base  
unit is ON (page 23).  
R The cordless handset has not been registered to the base unit. Register the  
cordless handset (feature #130 on page 104).  
The cordless handset will not R Make sure that the batteries are installed correctly (page 19).  
turn ON.  
R Fully charge the batteries (page 22).  
R Clean the charge contacts and charge again (page 22).  
The display is in a language I R Change the cordless handset display language (feature #110 on  
cannot read.  
page 103).  
is displayed.  
R The cordless handset is not registered to the base unit. Register it (feature  
#130 on page 104).  
R The cordless handset is too far from the base unit. Move closer.  
R Check that power cord is connected properly, and power switch of the base  
unit is ON (page 23).  
The cordless handset does  
not ring.  
R The ringer volume is turned OFF. Adjust it (page 27).  
R Silent mode is turned ON. Turn it OFF (feature #238 on page 51).  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
14. Help  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
Static, sound cuts in/out,  
fades. Interference from other  
electrical units.  
R Place the cordless handset and the base unit away from other electrical  
appliances.  
R Move closer to the base unit.  
Noise is heard, sound cuts in R You are using the cordless handset or base unit in an area with high  
and out.  
electrical interference. Re-position the base unit and use the cordless  
handset away from sources of interference.  
R Move closer to the base unit.  
R If you use a DSL/ADSL service, we recommend connecting a DSL/ADSL  
filter between the base unit and the telephone line jack. Contact your DSL/  
ADSL provider for details.  
The cordless handset beeps  
and/or flashes.  
R Battery charge is low. Fully charge the batteries (page 22).  
I fully charged the batteries,  
but  
R Clean the battery ends (  
,
) and the charge contacts with a dry cloth and  
charge again.  
–
–
–
still flashes,  
R It is time to replace the batteries (page 19).  
is displayed, or  
the operating time seems  
to be shorter.  
I cannot make calls with the  
cordless handset.  
R The cordless handset is too far from the base unit. Move closer and try  
again.  
I cannot make long distance  
calls with the cordless  
handset.  
R Make sure that you have long distance service.  
Caller information is slow to  
display.  
R Depending on your service provider/telephone company, the unit may  
display the caller’s information at the 2nd ring or later.  
R Move closer to the base unit.  
I cannot dial the telephone  
number edited in the caller  
list.  
R The telephone number you dialed might have been edited incorrectly (for  
example, the long distance “1” or the area code is missing). Edit the  
telephone number with another pattern (page 55).  
The 2nd caller’s information  
is not displayed during an  
outside call.  
R In order to use Caller ID, call waiting, or Call Waiting Caller ID (CWID), you  
must first contact your service provider/telephone company and subscribe  
to the desired service.  
After subscribing, you may need to contact your service provider/telephone  
company again to activate this specific service, even if you already  
subscribed to both Caller ID and Call Waiting with Caller ID services (CWID).  
I cannot register a cordless  
handset to a base unit.  
R The maximum number of cordless handsets are already registered to the  
base unit. Cancel unused cordless handset registrations from the base unit  
(feature #131 on page 104).  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
121  
14. Help  
14.3.8 Network (LAN connection only)  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
I cannot operate the following R Confirm the LED via the LAN port of the main board. If the LED is glowing  
functions.  
or blinking, network access is working correctly.  
If the LED is not glowing or blinking, confirm the LAN cable (Category 5  
(Cat-5) Ethernet cable) is connected to the LAN port of the main board  
correctly.  
–
–
–
–
–
PC printing  
Scanning  
Remote Control  
PC FAX  
Device Monitor  
R If the LED is blinking and you cannot perform the desired operation, the IP  
address of the unit may have changed.  
To detect the IP address, proceed as follows.  
[Start] A [All Programs] or [Programs] A [Panasonic] A the unit’s  
name A [IP Address Checker]  
R The IP address for the unit will be detected.  
Note:  
R If the IP address cannot be detected, enter it manually (feature #501 on  
page 94). The IP address of the computer and the unit must be in the  
same local IP address class as shown below. Set the IP address in the  
range of the number specified in the class corresponding to your local  
network scale.  
Class  
Subnet mask  
IP address  
Class A  
255.0.0.0  
10.0.0.1 -  
10.255.255.254  
Class B  
Class C  
255.255.0.0  
172.xx.0.1 -  
172.xx.255.254  
*1  
255.255.255.0  
192.168.xx.1 -  
192.168.xx.254  
*2  
*1 “xx” should be the same value for the unit and for the computer,  
as shown in the following example.  
Example: 172.16.0.1 - 172.16.255.254  
(The available range of “xx” is 16 - 31)  
*2 “xx” should be the same value for the unit and for the computer,  
as shown in the following example.  
Example: 192.168.0.1 - 192.168.0.254  
(The available range of “xx” is 0 - 255)  
R Your firewall software is blocking the connection. Disable the firewall  
software or change the firewall settings to make the Multi-Function Station  
work properly.  
R LAN features can be used when the unit and the computer are connected  
in same network segment only. Make sure the network is configured  
correctly. Consult your network administrator.  
The unit does not appear in  
the [Select a Network Device]  
dialog box when installing  
Multi-Function Station.  
R Your firewall software is blocking the connection and the setup program may  
not list any units. Consult your network administrator and temporarily disable  
the firewall software.  
R The unit is connected to another network segment and the setup program  
may not list any units. Make sure the network is configured correctly. Consult  
your network administrator.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
   
14. Help  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
The [Windows Security Alert] R Click [Keep Blocking] and run the Windows Firewall Setting Tool to allow  
dialog box appears and asks  
if I want to block  
the data transmission for Multi-Function Station (page 124).  
[PCCMFLPD] and I cannot  
operate the following  
functions after installing the  
Microsoft Windows XP  
Service Pack 2 or later.  
–
–
–
–
–
PC printing  
Scanning  
Remote Control  
PC FAX  
Device Monitor  
14.3.9 Answering machine  
Problem  
Cause & Solution  
I cannot receive a voice  
R Make sure the following features are set beforehand.  
message on the computer.  
–
Receiving a voice message into the computer (feature #365 on  
page 88)  
–
Setting the computer for PC TAM reception (feature #366 on page 30)  
I cannot play back the voice  
message on the computer.  
R A sound card and speaker are required to play back the voice message on  
the computer. Make sure that a sound card is installed correctly and check  
the speaker volume.  
I cannot listen to messages  
from a remote location.  
R Activate the remote operation feature by setting the remote operation ID  
beforehand (feature #306 on page 76, 88). Press the remote operation ID  
correctly and firmly.  
R The unit is not in TAM/FAX mode. Change to TAM/FAX mode (page 62).  
The other party complains  
that they cannot leave a voice  
message.  
R You may have subscribed to a voice mail service due to service packs  
offered by your telephone company. Fax and voice message reception may  
not be possible when voice mail is activated so we recommend you to:  
–
contact your telephone company and request to deactivate voice mail  
service, or  
–
subscribe to a Distinctive Ring service (page 68).  
R The recording time is set to “GREET ONLY”/“Greeting only”. Select “1  
MINUTE”/“1 min” or “3 MINUTES”/“3 min” (feature #305 on page 76,  
88).  
R The memory is full. Erase unnecessary messages (page 70, 75).  
R Make sure there is no other answering machine connected on the same line.  
I cannot operate the  
answering machine with the  
cordless handset  
R Someone is operating the answering machine.  
R You are too far from the base unit. Move closer to the base unit.  
(KX-MB2060 optional).  
The MPlaybackN light flashes  
R This is normal. New messages have been recorded. Listen to the new  
slowly.  
messages (page 70, 75).  
Caller ID information does not R The caller information will not be displayed if the message is memo  
display during message  
playback.  
recording (page 69) or conversation (page 69).  
14.3.10 If a power failure occurs  
R The unit will not function.  
R If any documents are stored in the memory (i.e. during copying, PC printing), they will be lost.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
123  
 
14. Help  
R The unit is not designed for making emergency telephone calls when the power fails. Alternative arrangements  
should be made for access to emergency services.  
R Fax transmission and reception will be interrupted.  
R Documents during fax transmission or fax reception will be lost.  
R When power is restored, a power down report will be printed out stating which fax items in the memory have been  
erased.  
14.3.11 Firewall setting tool for Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later/Windows Vista/  
Windows 7 users (LAN connection only)  
After installing Microsoft Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later/Windows Vista/Windows 7, you will not be able to use  
the following functions because the Windows Firewall feature will be activated and block the connection.  
–
–
Device Monitor  
LPD Manager (Network communication tool)  
The Windows Firewall Setting Tool enables you to change the Windows Firewall security settings and to use the  
above functions properly.  
1 Insert the CD-ROM that is supplied with the unit into your CD-ROM drive.  
R If the [Select Language] dialog box appears, select the desired language that you want to use with this  
software. Click [OK].  
2 [Tools] A [Windows Firewall Setting]  
R The [Windows Firewall Setting Tool] window will appear.  
3 [Add to the exceptions list] A [OK] A [OK]  
To confirm the security settings (For Windows XP users)  
1. [Start] A [Control Panel] A [Security Center]  
R The [Windows Security Center] window will appear.  
2. [Windows Firewall]  
R The [Windows Firewall] dialog box will appear.  
3. Click the [Exceptions] tab.  
4. Confirm that [Panasonic Trap Monitor Service] and [Panasonic LPD] are displayed and checked on the  
[Programs and Services] list.  
To confirm the security settings (For Windows Vista users)  
1. [Start] A [Control Panel] A [Security Center]  
R The [Windows Security Center] window will appear.  
2. [Windows Firewall]  
R The [Windows Firewall] dialog box will appear.  
3. [Change settings]  
R The [User Account Control] dialog box will appear.  
4. [Continue]  
5. Click the [Exceptions] tab.  
6. Confirm that [Panasonic Trap Monitor Service], [Panasonic LPD Manager] and [Panasonic LPD] are  
displayed and checked on the [Program or port] list.  
To confirm the security settings (For Windows 7 users)  
1. [Start] A [Control Panel] A [System and Security] A [Windows Firewall] A [Advanced settings]  
R The [Windows Firewall with Advanced Security] window will appear.  
2. [Inbound Rules]  
3. Confirm that [Panasonic Trap Monitor Service], [Panasonic LPD Manager] and [Panasonic LPD] are  
displayed and checked on the [Inbound Rules] list.  
14.3.12 Notice for KX-MB200/KX-MB700/KX-FLB880 series users  
If you have already installed KX-MB200/KX-MB700/KX-FLB880 series Multi-Function Station on your computer, use  
the following instructions to modify or add the printer driver, which changes after installing the KX-MB2000 series  
Multi-Function Station.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
   
14. Help  
You can modify or add a printer driver, as follows:  
1 Start Windows and insert the KX-MB200/KX-MB700/KX-FLB880 series CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.  
R If the [Select Language] dialog box appears, select the desired language that you want to use with this  
software. Click [OK].  
2 [Easy installation]  
3 [Modify] A [Next]  
4 Select [Modify Utility] or [Add Printer Driver]. A [Next]. Then follow the on-screen instructions.  
Important:  
R For users of versions prior to 1.12, download the latest software as follows, then activate it.  
[Start] A [All Programs] or [Programs] A [Panasonic] A the unit’s name A [Support Web Page].  
Then follow the on-screen instructions.  
For assistance, please visit http://www.panasonic.com/help  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
125  
15. Paper Jams  
Case 1:  
15.1 Recording paper jam  
Caution:  
When the recording paper has jammed near the  
manual input tray:  
15. . Paper Jams  
1. Pull open the paper input tray (A).  
R Do not pull out the jammed paper forcibly before  
opening the top cover.  
A
R To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your  
2. Open the manual input tray (B) and remove the  
jammed paper (C) carefully by pulling it upwards.  
Then close the manual input tray.  
hands under the top cover.  
C
B
15.1.1 When the recording paper has jammed  
inside of the unit  
The display will show the following:  
–
“PAPER JAMMED”  
L
“OPEN TOP COVER”  
–
“CHECK REAR COVER”  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
15. Paper Jams  
3. Close the paper input tray.  
Case 2:  
When the recording paper has jammed near the  
drum and toner cartridge:  
1. Pull open the paper input tray (A).  
D
R Open and close the top cover (D) to clear the  
message.  
A
2. Open the top cover (B) by holding the indentations  
(C) on both sides of the base unit.  
E
B
C
D
C
Caution:  
R The fuser unit (D) gets hot. Do  
not touch it.  
Note:  
R Do not touch the transfer roller (E).  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15. Paper Jams  
3. Remove the jammed paper (F) carefully by pulling it  
4. Close the paper input tray.  
upwards.  
F
5. Close the top cover by holding the indentations on  
Remove the jammed paper (G) carefully by pulling it  
toward you.  
both sides of the base unit, until locked.  
G
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15. Paper Jams  
Case 3:  
3. Remove the jammed paper (F) carefully by pulling it  
upwards.  
When the recording paper has jammed near the fuser  
unit:  
1. Open the top cover (A) by holding the indentations  
(B) on both sides of the base unit.  
D
A
B
C
F
B
4. Push back the green levers (G) to the original  
position.  
Caution:  
R The fuser unit (C) gets hot. Do  
not touch it.  
Note:  
R Do not touch the transfer roller (D).  
2. Lift both green levers (E) until they stop.  
G
E
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15. Paper Jams  
5. Close the top cover by holding the indentations on  
15.1.2 When the recording paper is not fed  
into the unit properly  
both sides of the base unit, until locked.  
The display will show the following:  
–
“CHECK PAPER #1 PRESS START”  
1 Pull the paper input tray until it clicks into place, then  
pull it completely out, lifting the front part of the tray.  
Remove the recording paper and straighten.  
2 Re-load the recording paper.  
3 Insert the paper input tray into the base unit, lifting  
the front part of the tray. Then push it completely into  
the base unit.  
Note:  
R If the message is still displayed, check the recording  
paper specifications and load the recording paper  
again. See page 16 for details.  
15.1.3 When the recording paper in the  
manual input tray is not fed into the unit  
properly  
The display will show the following.  
–
“CHECK PICK UP INPUT TRAY #2”  
1 Remove the recording paper.  
2 Re-insert the recording paper.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
15. Paper Jams  
Note:  
15.2 Document jams (Automatic  
document feeder)  
Caution:  
R If the message is still displayed, check the recording  
paper specifications and re-install recording paper.  
See page 18 for details.  
R Do not pull out the jammed document forcibly  
before lifting the ADF cover.  
1 Open the ADF cover (A) while holding the document  
cover (B).  
A
B
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
15. Paper Jams  
2 Remove the jammed document (C) carefully.  
When the document has jammed near the  
document entrance:  
C
When the document has jammed near the  
document exit:  
C
3 Close the ADF cover.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. Cleaning  
2 Hold the document cover while cleaning the white  
16.1 Cleaning the white plates and  
glass  
plates (B) and the scanner glass (C).  
16. . Cleaning  
Clean the white plates and glass when a black line, a  
white line or a dirty pattern appears on:  
–
–
–
–
your recording paper,  
the original document,  
the scanned data, or  
the fax document received by the other party.  
B
C
Caution:  
R Be careful when handling the drum and toner  
cartridge. See the caution for the drum cartridge  
on page 12 for details.  
R Do not use paper products, such as paper towels  
or tissues for cleaning.  
16.1.1 White plates and scanner glass  
1 Open the document cover (A).  
3 Close the document cover.  
A
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
16. Cleaning  
3 Remove the drum and toner cartridge (E) by holding  
16.1.2 Lower glass  
the tabs.  
1 Turn the power switch OFF.  
2 Open the top cover (A) by holding the indentations  
(B) on both sides of the base unit.  
A
D
B
E
C
B
4 Clean the lower glass (F) with a soft and dry cloth.  
Caution:  
The fuser unit (C) gets hot. Do not  
touch it.  
Note:  
F
R Do not touch the transfer roller (D).  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. Cleaning  
5 Reinstall the drum and toner cartridge (G) by holding  
6 Close the top cover by holding the indentations on  
the tabs.  
both sides of the base unit, until locked.  
G
Caution:  
R Make sure that the arrows (H) match, to install  
the drum and toner cartridge correctly.  
R To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your  
hands under the top cover.  
H
7 Turn the power switch ON.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16. Cleaning  
4 Close the ADF cover.  
16.2 Cleaning the document  
feeder rollers  
Clean the rollers when documents frequently misfeed.  
Caution:  
R Do not use paper products, such as paper towels  
or tissues for cleaning.  
1 Turn the power switch OFF.  
2 Open the ADF cover (A) while holding the document  
cover (B).  
A
B
5 Turn the power switch ON.  
3 Clean the document feeder rollers (C) with a cloth  
moistened with water, and let all parts dry thoroughly.  
C
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
17. General Information  
17.1 Reference lists and reports  
(Base unit only)  
17.2 Specifications  
17. . General Information  
17.2.1 Base unit  
You can print out the following lists and reports for your  
reference.  
n Applicable lines:  
Public Switched Telephone Network  
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
“SETUP LIST”  
“TEL NO. LIST”  
“JOURNAL REPORT”  
“BROADCAST LIST”  
“PRINTER TEST”  
“CALLER ID LIST”  
“ADDRESS LIST”  
“FTP SERVER LIST”  
“SMB FOLDER LIST”  
n Document size:  
1
5
Max. 216 mm (8 /2") in width, Max. 600 mm (23 /8")  
in length  
n Effective scanning width:  
3
208 mm (8 /16")  
n Effective printing width:  
Letter/Legal: 208 mm (8 /16")  
3
15  
A4: 202 mm (7 /16")  
*1  
n Transmission time :  
MSetN  
Approx. 4 s/page (ECM-MMR Memory  
*2  
transmission)  
n Scanning density:  
Scanning resolution:  
Up to 600 ´ 1,200 dpi (Optical)  
Up to 9,600 ´ 9,600 dpi (Interpolated)  
Copy resolution:  
Up to 600 ´ 600 dpi  
MMenuN MFNMEN  
Fax resolution:  
Horizontal: 8 pels/mm (203 pels/inch)  
1 Press MMenuN repeatedly to display “PRINT  
REPORT”.  
Vertical: 3.85 lines/mm (98 lines/inch)-in standard  
resolution,  
2 Press MFN or MEN repeatedly to display the desired  
item.  
7.7 lines/mm (196 lines/inch)-in fine/photo  
resolution,  
15.4 lines/mm (392 lines/inch)-in super  
fine resolution  
3 Press MSetN to start printing. A MMenuN  
n Photo resolution:  
64-level  
n Scanner type:  
Color Contact Image Sensor  
n Printer type:  
Laser Printer  
n Data compression system:  
Modified Huffman (MH), Modified READ (MR),  
Modified Modified READ (MMR)  
n Modem speed:  
33,600 / 31,200 / 28,800 / 26,400 / 24,000 / 21,600 /  
19,200 / 16,800 / 14,400 / 12,000 / 9,600 / 7,200 /  
4,800 / 2,400 bps; Automatic Fallback  
n Operating environment:  
10 °C – 32.5 °C (50 °F – 90.5 °F), 20 % – 70 % RH  
(Relative Humidity)  
n Dimensions:  
Approx. width 420 mm ´ depth 432 mm ´ height  
9
305 mm (16 /16" ´ 17" ´ 12")  
7
(Width is 505 mm (19 /8") when the handset unit is  
installed.)  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
17. General Information  
ITU-T No.1 Test Chart  
n Mass (Weight):  
Approx. 12 kg (26 lb)  
n Power consumption:  
Standby: Approx. 6 W  
Preheat: Approx. 65 W  
Copy: Approx. 500 W  
Maximum: Approx. 950 W (When the fuser lamp turns  
on)  
n Power supply:  
120 V AC, 60 Hz  
n Memory capacity  
(for operation and storing memory):  
32 MB  
n Fax memory capacity:  
5 MB in total  
Approx. 220 pages of memory reception  
Approx. 150 pages of memory transmission  
(Based on the ITU-T No. 1 Test Chart in standard  
resolution.)  
Note:  
R Design and specifications are subject to change  
without notice.  
R The pictures and illustrations in these instructions  
may vary slightly from the actual product.  
R The accuracy of the clock is approximately ±60  
n Voice memory capacity  
Approx. 30 minutes of recording time  
n Scan to email address memory capacity:  
5 MB in total (including the header and email  
message)  
seconds a month.  
Recording paper specifications  
Plain paper/Thin paper size:  
n Scan to FTP server memory capacity:  
5 MB in total  
1
11  
A4: 210 mm ´ 297 mm (8 /4" ´ 11 /16")  
1
n Scan to SMB folder memory capacity:  
5 MB in total  
Letter: 216 mm ´ 279 mm (8 /2" ´ 11")  
Legal: 216 mm ´ 356 mm (8 /2" ´ 14")  
B5(JIS): 182 mm ´ 257 mm (7 /16" ´ 10 /8")  
B5(ISO): 176 mm ´ 250 mm (6 /16" ´ 9 /16")  
16K: 195 mm ´ 270 mm (7 /16" ´ 10 /8")  
8.5 ´ 13: 216 mm ´ 330 mm (8 /2" ´ 13")  
8.5 ´ 13.4: 216 mm ´ 340 mm (8 /2" ´ 13 /8")  
*1  
1
3
1
n Laser diode properties:  
Laser output: Max. 15 mW  
Wavelength: 760 nm - 800 nm  
Emission duration: Continuous  
15  
13  
11  
5
*1  
1
*1  
n Print speed:  
Approx. 24 ppm (pages per minute)  
1
3
Label size:  
n Printing resolution:  
600 ´ 600 dpi  
1
11  
A4: 210 mm ´ 297 mm (8 /4" ´ 11 /16")  
1
Letter: 216 mm ´ 279 mm (8 /2" ´ 11")  
*1 Transmission speed depends on the contents of the  
pages, resolution, telephone line conditions and  
capability of the other party’s machine.  
Recording paper weight:  
2
2
64 g/m to 90 g/m (17 lb to 24 lb)  
*2 Transmission speed is based on the ITU-T No. 1  
Test Chart with original mode. If the capability of the  
other party’s machine is inferior to your unit, the  
transmission time may be longer.  
*1 Manual input tray only  
17.2.2 Cordless handset (KX-MB2060  
optional)  
n Standard:  
DECT 6.0 (Digital Enhanced Cordless  
Telecommunications 6.0)  
n Number of channels:  
60 Duplex Channels  
n Frequency range:  
1.92 GHz to 1.93 GHz  
n Duplex procedure:  
TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access)  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
17. General Information  
n Channel spacing:  
Toner life  
1,728 kHz  
Toner cartridge life depends on the amount of content in  
a printed document. Toner cartridge life varies in actual  
usage. The following is the approximate number of  
pages that the toner cartridge can print according to the  
various printing examples.  
n Bit rate:  
1,152 kbit/s  
n Modulation:  
GFSK (Gaussian Frequency Shift Keying)  
Example 1  
n RF transmission power:  
Approx. 2,000 pages can be printed.  
115 mW (max.)  
n Voice coding:  
Table of Contents1.  
1. Table of Contents 1. Introduction and Installation Accessories  
1.1 Included accessories.1.2 Accessory information.Finding the Controls  
1.3 Description of buttons.1.4 Overview Installation  
ADPCM 32 kbit/s  
1.5 Toner cartridge and drum unit  
1.6 Document tray 1.7 Output tray1.8 Recording paper2. Preparation  
2.1 Connections 2.2 Turning the power switch ON Help Button2.3 Help function Volume  
n Operating environment:  
0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F), 20 % - 80 % RH (Relative  
Humidity)  
4. PC Operations/ Setup 4.1 Connecting to  
4.2 Installing Multi-Function Station 4.3 Starting Multi-Function Station Printing  
4.4 Using the unit as printer Scanning 4.5 Using the unit as scannerRemote Control  
a
computer  
a
a
4.6 Operating the unit from your computer.  
4.7 Fax sending/receiving using Multi-Function Station  
4.8 Registering the computer in the LANnetwork with the optional LAN board  
4.9 Confirming the status of the unit 5. Case Setup  
/
5.1 Selecting the way to use your unit 5.2 Case 1: FAX ONLY  
n Dimensions:  
Approx. width 49 mm ´ depth 33 mm ´ height 160 mm  
(1 /16" ´ 1 /16" ´ 6 /16")  
Table of Contents2.  
1. Table of Contents  
15  
5
5
1.1 Included accessories.1.2 Accessory information.Finding the Controls  
1.3 Description of buttons.1.4 Overview Installation1.5 Toner cartridge and drum unit  
1.6 Document tray 1.7 Output tray1.8 Recording paper2. Preparation  
2.1 Connections 2.2 Turning the power switch ON Help Button2.3 Help function Volume  
n Mass (Weight):  
Approx. 130 g (0.29 lb)  
Thank you for purchasing  
Things you should keep  
a
Panasonic fax machine.  
a
record of  
Attach your sales receipt here.  
For your future reference  
Date of purchase  
17.2.3 Charger unit (KX-MB2060 optional)  
Example 2  
n Operating environment:  
0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F), 20 % - 80 % RH (Relative  
Humidity)  
Approx. 1,000 pages can be printed.  
Table of Contents1.  
1. Table of Contents  
/
Introduction and Installation Accessories  
1.1 Included accessories.  
n Dimensions:  
1.2 Accessory information.Finding the Controls  
1.3 Description of buttons.  
1.4 Overview Installation  
1.5 Toner cartridge and drum unit  
1.6 Document tray  
1.7 Output tray  
1.8 Recording paper  
Approx. width 72 mm ´ depth 84 mm ´ height 51 mm  
(2 /16" ´ 3 /16" ´ 2")  
2. Preparation  
2.1 Connections  
2.2 Turning the power switch ON Help Button  
2.3 Help function Volume  
2.4 Adjusting volume Initial Programming  
13  
5
2.5 Dialing mode  
2.7 Your logo.  
2.6 Date and time.  
2.8 Your fax number  
n Mass (Weight):  
Approx. 60 g (0.13 lb)  
n Power consumption:  
Standby: Approx. 0.1 W  
Maximum: Approx. 2.6 W  
Thank you for purchasing  
a
Panasonic fax machine.  
Things you should keep  
a
record of  
Attach your sales receipt here.  
For your future reference  
n Power supply:  
Date of purchase  
Serial number (found on the rear of the unit)  
AC adaptor (120 V AC, 60 Hz)  
Example 3  
Approx. 650 pages can be printed.  
Table of Contents1.  
1. Table of Contents  
/
Introduction and Installation Accessories  
1.1 Included accessories.  
1.2 Accessory information.Finding the Controls  
1.3 Description of buttons.  
1.4 Overview Installation  
1.5 Toner cartridge and drum unit  
1.6 Document tray  
1.7 Output tray  
2. Preparation  
2.1 Connections  
1.8 Recording paper  
Thank you for purchasing  
a
Panasonic fax machine.  
Things you should keep  
a
record of  
Attach your sales receipt here.  
For your future reference  
Date of purchase  
Serial number (found on the rear of the unit)  
Note:  
R There are various factors that determine the actual  
toner cartridge life, such as temperature, humidity,  
type of paper and how much toner you use for the  
number of pages per print job. The actual number of  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
17. General Information  
pages your toner cartridge will print may be  
significantly less than this estimate if your unit is often  
used for printing small number of pages per job.  
Because many of the factors that determine the  
actual toner cartridge life cannot be controlled, we  
cannot guarantee a minimum number of pages that  
will be printed by your toner cartridge.  
R The number of pages changes with the depth,  
thickness and size of the characters.  
R If you turn on the toner save feature, the toner  
cartridge will last approx. 20 % longer.  
Drum life  
The drum cartridge needs to be replaced regularly. The  
maximum drum life is approx. 6,000 pages.  
Note:  
R There are various factors that determine the actual  
drum cartridge life, such as temperature, humidity,  
type of paper and how much toner you use for the  
number of pages per print job. The actual number of  
pages your drum cartridge will print may be  
significantly less than this estimate if your unit is often  
used for printing small number of pages per job.  
Because many of the factors that determine the  
actual drum cartridge life cannot be controlled, we  
cannot guarantee a minimum number of pages that  
will be printed by your drum cartridge.  
Waste disposal method  
Waste material should be disposed of under conditions  
which meet all national and local environmental  
regulations.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
17. General Information  
17.3 Information of copyrights and licenses  
R This product uses a part of NetBSD kernel.  
The use of a part of NetBSD kernel is based on the typical BSD style license below.  
Copyright (c)  
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted  
provided that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions  
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the  
distribution.  
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following  
acknowledgement:  
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its  
contributors.  
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or  
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND  
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
However, parts of the NetBSD Kernel are provided with the following copyright notices.  
Copyright (c) 1980, 1983, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1985, 1986, 1988, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights  
reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights  
reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1993, 1994, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All  
rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights  
reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights  
reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights  
reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1989, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights  
reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
17. General Information  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights  
reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights  
reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights  
reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights  
reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1993, 1994, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights  
reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1982, 1988, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1983, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1985, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1985, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1986, 1989, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1987, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1987, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1987, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1988 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved  
Copyright (c) 1988 Stephen Deering.  
Copyright (c) 1988 University of Utah.  
Copyright (c) 1988, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1988, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1988, 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1989, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1989, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1991, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1992 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1993 Adam Glass  
Copyright (C) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1994 Gordon W. Ross  
Copyright (c) 1994 Winning Strategies, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 John S. Dyson All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 Matt Thomas. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 Matthew R. Green. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 Paul Kranenburg  
Copyright (c) 1996, 1997, 1999, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996, 2000 Christopher G. Demetriou. All rights reserved.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. General Information  
Copyright (c) 1996,1999 by Internet Software Consortium.  
Copyright (c) 1996-1999 by Internet Software Consortium.  
Copyright (c) 1997 Jonathan Stone and Jason R. Thorpe. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997 Christos Zoulas. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997 Manuel Bouyer. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2002 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997,98 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (C) 1997-2000 Sony Computer Science Laboratories Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997-2002 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998 Todd C. Miller <To[email protected]> All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1998, 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1999 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (C) 1999 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000 Jason L. Wright ([email protected]) All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1999, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 2000, 2001, 2002 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 2002 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright 1998 Massachusetts Institute of Technology. All rights reserved.  
Copyright 2001 Wasabi Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Portions Copyright (c) 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.  
Portions Copyright (c) 1995 by International Business Machines, Inc.  
Copyright (c) 1983, 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 by Internet Software Consortium. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1980, 1986, 1989 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1988 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1994 Christopher G. Demetriou. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1999 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Copyright (c) 1996 Gardner Buchanan <[email protected]> All rights reserved.  
Parts of the NetBSD Kernel are provided with the licenses that are slightly different from the above Berkeley-formed  
license. Please refer the source code of the NetBSD Kernel about the details.  
The source code of the NetBSD Kernel is provided by the NetBSD CVS Repositories  
(http://cvsweb.netbsd.org/bsdweb.cgi/), and this product includes parts of the source code in the following directories.  
http://cvsweb.netbsd.org/bsdweb.cgi/src/sys/kern/  
http://cvsweb.netbsd.org/bsdweb.cgi/src/sys/net/  
http://cvsweb.netbsd.org/bsdweb.cgi/src/sys/netinet/  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. General Information  
R This product contains Net-SNMP software and is using it based on the following license conditions.  
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----  
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University  
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000  
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California  
All Rights Reserved  
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and  
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that  
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the  
name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity  
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission.  
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES  
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE  
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR  
PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS  
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE.  
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----  
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided  
that the following conditions are met:  
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer.  
*
*
*
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may  
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written  
permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''  
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER  
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR  
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF  
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. General Information  
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----  
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided  
that the following conditions are met:  
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer.  
*
*
*
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived  
from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO  
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;  
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,  
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR  
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED  
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----  
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,  
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.  
Use is subject to license terms below.  
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.  
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun  
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided  
that the following conditions are met:  
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer.  
*
*
*
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to  
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS''  
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. General Information  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER  
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR  
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF  
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
Also this product contains software which includes following notices and licenses.  
/***********************************************************  
Copyright 1988, 1989, 1990 by Carnegie Mellon University  
Copyright 1989 TGV, Incorporated  
All Rights Reserved  
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and  
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that  
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the  
name of CMU and TGV not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software  
without specific, written prior permission.  
CMU AND TGV DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING  
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR  
TGV BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY  
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN  
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR  
IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.  
******************************************************************/  
R This product contains NetBSD software and is using it based on the following license conditions.  
/*-  
* Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.  
* All rights reserved.  
*
* This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided  
* that the following conditions are met:  
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
*
following disclaimer.  
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
* 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or  
*
*
*
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
* WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
* DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
* DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND  
* ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
* SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
*/  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. General Information  
R This product contains NetBSD software and is using it based on the following license conditions.  
/*  
* Copyright (c) 1989 The Regents of the University of California.  
* All rights reserved.  
*
* This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Tom Truscott.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided  
* that the following conditions are met:  
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
*
following disclaimer.  
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following  
*
*
*
*
acknowledgement:  
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its  
contributors.  
* 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or  
*
*
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
* WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
* DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
* DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND  
* ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
* SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
*/  
R This product contains NetBSD software and is using it based on the following license conditions.  
/*  
* Copyright (c) 1987, 1993, 1994  
* The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided  
* that the following conditions are met:  
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
*
following disclaimer.  
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following  
*
*
*
*
acknowledgement:  
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its  
contributors.  
* 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or  
*
*
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
* WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
* DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
* DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. General Information  
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND  
*
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
*
*
*/  
R This product contains NetBSD software and is using it based on the following license conditions.  
/*-  
* Copyright (c) 1990, 1993  
* The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.  
*
* This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided  
* that the following conditions are met:  
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
*
following disclaimer.  
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
* 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or  
*
*
*
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
* WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
* DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
* DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND  
* ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
* SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
*/  
R This product contains thttpd software that ACMELabs developed and is using it based on the following license  
conditions.  
Copyright 1995,1998,1999, 2000 by Jef Poskanzer <[email protected]>.  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided  
that the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
following disclaimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND  
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR  
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER  
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR  
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF  
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. General Information  
R This product contains NetBSD software and is using it based on the following license conditions.  
/*-  
* Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.  
* All rights reserved.  
*
* This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided  
* that the following conditions are met:  
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
*
following disclaimer.  
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
* 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or  
*
*
*
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
* WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
* DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
* DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND  
* ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
* SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
*/  
R This product contains NetBSD software and is using it based on the following license conditions.  
/*-  
* Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.  
* All rights reserved.  
*
* This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided  
* that the following conditions are met:  
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
*
following disclaimer.  
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
* 3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or  
*
*
*
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
* WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
* DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
* DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND  
* ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
* SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
*/  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. General Information  
R This product contains NetBSD software and is using it based on the following license conditions.  
/*  
* Copyright (c) 1989 The Regents of the University of California.  
* All rights reserved.  
*
* This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Tom Truscott.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided  
* that the following conditions are met:  
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the  
*
following disclaimer.  
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following  
*
*
*
*
acknowledgement:  
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its  
contributors.  
* 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or  
* promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.  
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
* WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE  
* DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
* DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND  
* ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
* SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
*/  
R This product includes only MD4 and DES of OpenSSL software developed by the OpenSSL Project, which are  
used only in SMB protocol authentication. Also OpenSSL software is used under the following terms and conditions  
of license.  
LICENSE ISSUES  
==============  
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of  
the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.  
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style  
Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL  
please contact [email protected].  
OpenSSL License  
---------------  
/* ====================================================================  
* Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions  
* are met:  
*
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. General Information  
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright  
*
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  
*
*
*
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in  
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the  
distribution.  
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this  
*
*
*
*
software must display the following acknowledgment:  
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project  
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to  
*
*
*
*
endorse or promote products derived from this software without  
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact  
[email protected].  
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"  
*
*
*
nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written  
permission of the OpenSSL Project.  
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following  
*
*
*
*
acknowledgment:  
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project  
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"  
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY  
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR  
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,  
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT  
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,  
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)  
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED  
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
* ====================================================================  
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young  
* ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim  
* Hudson ([email protected]).  
*
*/  
Original SSLeay License  
-----------------------  
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected])  
* All rights reserved.  
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written  
* by Eric Young ([email protected]).  
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.  
*
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17. General Information  
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as  
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions  
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,  
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation  
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms  
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).  
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in  
* the code are not to be removed.  
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution  
* as the author of the parts of the library used.  
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or  
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.  
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without  
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions  
* are met:  
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright  
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.  
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  
*
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.  
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software  
*
*
*
*
*
must display the following acknowledgement:  
"This product includes cryptographic software written by  
Eric Young ([email protected])"  
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library  
being used are not cryptographic related :-).  
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from  
*
*
*
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:  
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"  
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND  
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE  
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS  
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT  
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY  
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
* SUCH DAMAGE.  
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or  
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be  
* copied and put under another distribution licence  
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]  
*/  
R JPEG  
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18. Index  
#459 Set fax to default: 86  
#460 Input tray setting for copy: 90  
#461 Default copy resolution: 90  
#462 Contrast hold: 81  
#463 Default operation mode: 81  
#464 Mode timer: 81  
18.1 Index  
#
# [Base unit]  
#100 Quick setup: 78  
#101 Date and time: 28  
#467 Page layout hold: 90  
#468 Zoom hold: 90  
#102 Your logo: 29  
#469 Collate hold: 90  
#103 Your fax number: 29  
#110 Language: 78  
#112 Voice prompt: 88  
#473 Edge hold: 90  
#474 Frame margin: 90  
#475 Margin hold: 90  
#120 Dialing mode: 24  
#121 Flash time: 78  
#482 Toner save: 14, 82  
#493 Scan mode: 92  
#145 LCD display contrast: 78  
#147 Scale selection: 79  
#494 Scan parameter hold: 92  
#500 DHCP mode: 94  
#155 Change password: 79  
#158 Maintenance time: 79  
#159 Set all features to default: 79  
#161 Ringtone: 79  
#165 Beep sound: 80  
#210 FAX ring count: 80  
#501 IP address: 94  
#502 Subnet mask: 94  
#503 Default gateway: 94  
#504 DNS server #1: 94  
#505 DNS server #2: 94  
#507 Machine name: 94  
#508 MAC address: 94  
#211 TAM ring count: 80  
#216 Automatic caller ID list: 80  
#226 Time adjustment: 80  
#237 Silent mode start/end: 50  
#238 Silent mode ON/OFF: 50  
#289 All phonebook erase: 83  
#305 Caller’s recording time: 88  
#306 Remote operation ID: 88  
#310 Call screening: 88  
#532 Approved users: 95  
#533 Auto IP: 95  
#534 HTTPD: 95  
#535 IPv6 protocol: 95  
#538 WINS server #1: 95  
#539 WINS server #2: 95  
#578 All email address erase: 96  
#774 Data timeout: 91  
#315 Greeting time: 88  
#365 PC TAM setting: 88  
#776 Mutual A4/letter print: 91  
# [Cordless handset]  
#366 PC TAM reception: 30  
#367 Web voice playback mode: 73  
#368 Web voice playback access code: 73  
#369 TAM to email address setting: 88  
#380 Paper size in the paper input tray: 80  
#381 Paper size in the manual input tray: 81  
#383 Paper type for paper input tray: 81  
#384 Paper type for manual input tray: 81  
#400 Auto answer: 81  
#101 Date and time: 28  
#104 Handset name: 103  
#110 Language: 103  
#130 Registration: 104  
#131 Deregistration: 104  
#145 LCD display contrast: 102  
#160 Ringer volume: 27  
#161 Ringtone: 101  
#165 Beep sound: 102  
#401 Confirmation report: 57, 83  
#402 Automatic journal report: 57, 83  
#403 Power save: 81  
#411 Overseas mode: 83  
#412 Delayed send: 84  
#200 Auto talk: 50  
#211 TAM ring count: 76  
#213 View caller ID list: 55  
#237 Silent mode start/end: 51  
#238 Silent mode ON/OFF: 51  
#274 Intercom: 104  
#413 ECM selection: 84  
#416 Connecting tone: 84  
#418 Maximum fax speed: 84  
#419 Quick scan: 84  
#430 Distinctive Ring: 68  
#431 Fax ring pattern: 68  
#302 Record greeting message: 74  
#303 Play greeting message: 74  
#304 Pre-recorded greeting message: 74  
#305 Caller’s recording time: 76  
#306 Remote operation ID: 76  
#323 Play new message: 75  
#324 Play all messages: 75  
#325 All message erase: 75  
#327 Auto answer ON: 62  
#328 Auto answer OFF: 64  
#330 Voice mail access: 99  
#432 Auto reduction: 85  
#434 Fax activation code: 85  
#437 Memory reception alert: 85  
#438 Friendly reception: 85  
#442 PC fax setting: 86  
#443 PC fax reception: 30  
#448 Fax preview mode: 66  
#450 Web fax preview access code: 66  
#451 Fax receive notify: 86  
#452 Fax to email address setting: 86  
#331 Store voice mail access number: 100  
#340 Message alert: 76  
#720 Alarm: 103  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
18. Index  
Quick ID: 44  
Reserve: 47  
Zoom: 43  
Copy features: 90  
Copy size: 42  
Cordless handset  
A
Additional cordless handsets: 104  
Address list: 137  
Alarm (Feature #720): 103  
All message erase (Feature #325): 75  
Approved users (Feature #532): 95  
Auto answer OFF (Feature #328): 64  
Auto answer ON (Feature #327): 62  
Auto answer setting (Feature #400): 81  
Auto IP (Feature #533): 95  
Auto reduction (Feature #432): 85  
Auto talk feature (Feature #200): 50  
Automatic document feeder: 25, 43, 58  
Canceling (Feature #131): 104  
Eco mode: 23  
Group name: 52  
Handset name (Feature #104): 103  
Locator: 104  
Registration (Feature #130): 104  
D
Data timeout (Feature #774): 91  
Date and time (Feature #101): 28  
Default copy resolution (Feature #461): 90  
Default gateway (Feature #503): 94  
Default operation mode (Feature #463): 81  
Delayed transmission (Feature #412): 84  
DHCP mode (Feature #500): 94  
Dialing mode (Feature #120): 24  
Display (Base unit)  
B
Basic features: 78  
Battery  
Charge: 22  
Installation: 19  
Performance: 22  
Replacement: 19  
Beep sound (Feature #165): 80, 102  
Belt clip: 20  
Contrast (Feature #145): 78  
Messages: 110  
Broadcast programming list: 137  
Broadcast transmission: 59  
Button description  
Base unit: 8  
Display (Cordless handset)  
Contrast (Feature #145): 102  
Icons: 10  
Messages: 112  
Cordless handset: 9  
Distinctive Ring service (Feature #430): 68  
DNS server #1 (Feature #504): 94  
DNS server #2 (Feature #505): 94  
Document size: 25  
Drum cartridge: 12  
Drum life: 140  
C
Call screening (Feature #310): 88  
Call waiting: 54  
Caller ID: 54  
Calling back: 55  
Storing: 56  
E
Viewing (Feature #213): 55  
Caller ID list (Feature #216): 80  
Caller’s recording time (Feature #305): 76, 88  
Chain dial: 53  
Character entry: 106  
Cleaning: 133, 136  
Collate hold (Feature #469): 90  
Conference calls: 105  
Confirmation report (Feature #401): 57, 83  
Connecting tone (Feature #416): 84  
Connections: 21  
Easy Print Utility: 36  
ECM selection (Feature #413): 84  
Eco mode: 23  
Edge hold (Feature #473): 90  
Email address  
All erase (Feature #578): 96  
Storing: 98  
Email conditions (SSL exception): 115  
Extension telephone: 65  
F
LAN: 21  
USB: 32  
Contrast: 42, 57  
Fax activation code (Feature #434): 85  
Fax features: 83  
Contrast hold (Feature #462): 81  
Copy: 42  
Fax number (Feature #103): 29  
FAX ONLY mode: 62, 63  
Collation: 44  
Edge: 47  
Image repeat: 44  
Margin: 47  
Fax preview mode (Feature #448): 66  
Fax receive notify (Feature #451): 86  
FAX ring count (Feature #210): 80  
Fax to email address: 63, 64  
N in 1: 46  
N in 1 (Separate): 47  
Poster: 46  
Fax to email address setting (Feature #452): 86  
Flash time (Feature #121): 78  
Frame margin (Feature #474): 90  
Friendly reception (Feature #438): 85  
Proof set: 44  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18. Index  
FTP server list: 137  
Manual input tray: 18  
Margin hold (Feature #475): 90  
Maximum fax speed (Feature #418): 84  
Memo message: 69  
Memory reception alert (Feature #437): 85  
Memory redial: 49  
Message alert (Feature #340): 76  
Missed calls: 54  
Mode timer (Feature #464): 81  
Multi-Function Station software  
Activating: 33  
G
Greeting message  
TAM/FAX: 69  
Greeting message time  
TAM/FAX (Feature #315): 88  
Group name: 52  
H
Installing: 31  
Uninstalling: 33  
Mutual A4/letter print (Feature #776): 91  
Handset unit: 18  
Help: 26  
Basic settings: 26  
Caller ID: 26  
Copier: 26  
Errors: 26  
N
Network features: 97  
Fax sending/receiving: 26  
Feature list: 26  
Phonebook: 26  
Q and A: 26  
O
OCR software: 38  
One-touch dial  
Reports: 26  
TAM operation: 26  
Hold  
Base unit: 49  
Base unit: 51  
Sending faxes: 58  
Overseas mode (Feature #411): 83  
Cordless handset: 49  
HTTPD (Feature #534): 95  
P
Page layout hold (Feature #467): 90  
Paper size  
Manual input tray (Feature #381): 81  
Paper input tray (Feature #380): 80  
Paper type  
I
Input tray setting  
Copy (Feature #460): 90  
Intercom: 104  
Base unit: 104  
Manual input tray (Feature #384): 81  
Paper input tray (Feature #383): 81  
Password (Feature #155): 79  
PC fax reception (Feature #443): 30  
PC fax setting (Feature #442): 86  
PC print features: 91  
PC TAM reception (Feature #366): 30  
PC TAM setting (Feature #365): 88  
Phonebook (Shared phonebook)  
All erase (Feature #289): 83  
Editing: 52  
Cordless handset (Feature #274): 104  
IP address (Feature #501): 94  
IPv6 protocol (Feature #535): 95  
J
Jams  
Document: 131  
Recording paper: 126  
Journal report (Feature #402): 57, 83, 137  
Junk fax prohibitor: 65  
Erasing: 52  
Groups: 52, 54  
Making a phone call: 53  
Sending faxes: 58  
Storing: 52  
K
Keytones (Feature #165): 80, 102  
Play all messages (Feature #324): 75  
Play greeting message (Feature #303): 74  
Play new message (Feature #323): 75  
Power failure: 123  
Power save (Feature #403): 81  
Power switch: 23  
L
Label: 35  
LAN features: 94  
Language (Feature #110): 78, 103  
Listening to recorded messages: 70, 73, 75  
Logo (Feature #102): 29  
Pre-recorded greeting message (Feature #304): 74  
Printer test: 137  
Programming  
Base unit programming: 77  
Cordless handset programming: 99  
Pull scan: 40  
M
MAC address (Feature #508): 94  
Machine name (Feature #507): 94  
Maintenance time (Feature #158): 79  
Scan application: 40  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18. Index  
Viewer: 40  
Push scan: 37  
Email: 38  
Email address: 38  
File: 37  
S
Scale selection (Feature #147): 79  
Scan features: 92  
Scan mode (Feature #493): 92  
Scan parameter hold (Feature #494): 92  
Scanner glass: 25, 42, 57  
Sending faxes  
Base unit one-touch dial: 58  
Broadcast: 60  
FTP: 39  
OCR: 38  
SMB folder: 40  
Viewer: 37  
Q
Computer document: 61  
From memory: 58  
Quick scan: 58  
Quick scan mode (Feature #419): 84  
Quick setup (Feature #100): 78  
Manually: 57  
Phonebook: 58  
Set fax default (Feature #459): 86  
Setup list: 137  
Silent mode ON/OFF (Feature #238): 50, 51  
Silent mode start/end (Feature #237): 50, 51  
Soft keys: 9  
Storing  
Broadcast: 59  
Email address: 98  
One touch: 51  
R
Receiving faxes  
Automatically: 62  
Computer: 65  
Manually: 64  
Web browser: 66  
Recording (Base unit)  
Conversation: 69  
Greeting message: 69  
Memo message: 69  
Recording (Cordless handset)  
Conversation: 75  
Greeting message (Feature #302): 74  
Recording paper: 16  
Recording paper size: 138  
Recording time  
Phonebook: 52  
Voice mail access number (Feature #331): 100  
Subnet mask (Feature #502): 94  
T
TAM to email address: 63  
TAM to email address setting (Feature #369): 88  
TAM/FAX mode: 61, 62  
Incoming message: 76, 88  
TAM/FAX greeting: 88  
Redial list: 49  
TEL mode: 62, 64  
Telephone number list: 137  
Time adjustment (Feature #226): 80  
Toner cartridge: 12  
Redialing  
Base unit: 49, 57, 58  
Cordless handset: 49  
Remote operation: 73  
Remote operation ID (Feature #306): 76, 88  
Reports  
Toner life: 139  
Toner save (Feature #482): 14, 82  
Transferring a call: 105  
V
Address: 137  
Voice mail access (Feature #330): 99  
Voice prompt (Feature #112): 88  
Voice time/day stamp: 70  
Voice transfer  
Broadcast programming: 137  
Broadcast sending: 60  
Caller ID: 80, 137  
Confirmation: 57, 83, 109  
FTP server: 137  
Journal: 57, 83, 109, 137  
Power down: 123  
Printer test: 137  
Voice to email: 71  
Voice to PC: 71  
Volume  
Base unit: 27  
Cordless handset: 27  
Setup: 137  
Telephone number: 137  
Reset all features (Feature #159): 79  
Reset fax features (Feature #459): 86  
Resolution: 42, 57  
W
Web fax preview access code (Feature #450): 66  
Web voice playback access code (Feature #368): 73  
Web voice playback mode (Feature #367): 73  
WINS server #1 (Feature #538): 95  
Ring count  
FAX ONLY (Feature #210): 80  
TAM/FAX (Feature #211): 76, 80  
Ring pattern for Distinctive Ring (Feature #431): 68  
Ringer volume (Feature #160): 27  
Ringtone (Feature #161): 79, 101  
WINS server #2 (Feature #539): 95  
Z
Zoom hold (Feature #468): 90  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY: 1-877-833-8855  
PNQX2928ZA CM0910SY0-CD  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Oven H4880B User Manual
National Instruments Network Router cFP RTD 124 User Manual
Nikon Headphones 27045 User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill NTTL10510 User Manual
One for All Universal Remote URC 7780 User Manual
Onkyo Stereo System S3200 User Manual
Optoma Technology Projector TX330 User Manual
Oregon Weather Radio WR608 User Manual
Panamax Power Supply MAX 5410 User Manual
Parkside Grinder PDS 200 A User Manual